PLC Hardware, Software, Etc PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 268
At a glance
Powered by AI
The manual provides information about the D50 PLC including its operation, configuration, installation and programming.

The purpose of this manual is to describe the D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).

The manual is organized into chapters covering introduction, system configuration, product specification, installation and wiring, CPU operation and memory, instructions, testing and troubleshooting.

D50 PLC

Users Manual

The information contained in this manual is the property of Cutler-Hammer, Inc. Information in this
manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of CutlerHammer, Inc.
Any Cutler-Hammer software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement. The
software may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the
law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement. No part of
this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of Cutler-Hammer, Inc.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND


Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in paragraph
(b)(3)(B) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DAR 7-104.9(a).
Contractor/Manufacturer is Cutler-Hammer, P.O. Box 6166, Westerville, OH 43086-6166.

TRADEMARKS
Commercial names of products from other manufacturers or developers that appear in this manual are
registered or unregistered trademarks of those respective manufacturers or developers, which have
expressed neither approval nor disapproval of Cutler-Hammer products.
Copyright Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 1998. All rights reserved.
Catalog Number D50SA122
P/N 01-00478-00

Preface

Preface
Welcome to Cutler-Hammers D50 PLC User's Manual. This preface describes the contents of this
manual and provides information on Support Services.

ii

D50 PLC User's Manual

About This Manual


Purpose
This manual focuses on describing the D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).

Whats Inside
This manual is organized in the following way:
Preface
Chapter 1: Introduction
Chapter 2: System Configuration
Chapter 3: Product Specification
Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring
Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory
Chapter 6: Instructions
Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems
Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol
Appendix B: Special I/O Functions
Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Preface

iii

Support Services
It is Cutler-Hammers goal to ensure your greatest possible satisfaction with the operation of our
products. We are dedicated to providing fast, friendly, and accurate assistance. That is why we offer
you so many ways to get the support you need. Whether its by phone, fax, modem, or mail, you can
access Cutler-Hammer support information 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Our wide range of
services include:
Technical Support
1-800-809-2772
If you are in the U.S. or Canada, you can take advantage of our toll-free line for technical assistance
with hardware and software product selection, system design and installation, and system debugging
and diagnostics. Technical support engineers are available for calls during regular business hours
(8 am - 5:30 pm EST) by calling 1-800-809-2772. International calls can be made to either the Tech
Line at 1-800-809-2772 (toll call) or the Cutler-Hammer main business line at 614-882-3282.
Emergency Technical Support
1-800-809-2772
Because machines do not run on a nine-to-five schedule, we offer emergency after-hours technical
support. A technical support engineer can be paged for emergencies involving plant down situations or
safety issues. Emergency support calls are automatically routed directly to our answering service afterhours (5:30 pm - 8 am EST) and weekends. For emergency technical support, call 1-800-809-2772.
Does not currently include product repairs or shipping outside normal business hours.
Technical Support Fax
614-882-0417
You can also contact our technical support engineers by faxing your support requests directly to APSC
Westerville at 614-882-0417.
Information Fax-Back Service

614-899-5323

The latest Cutler-Hammer product information, specifications, technical notes and company news is
available to you via fax through our direct document request service at 614-899-5323. Using a touchtone phone, you can select any of the info faxes from our automated product literature and technical
document library, punch in a fax number and receive the information immediately.
Bulletin Board Service

614-899-5209

Parameters: 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, parity none, 9600-28.8K baud.


If you have modem access, you can dial in directly to our electronic bulletin board service for the latest
product and company information. File sharing, product software downloads and our user message
service are just a few of the things you will find online at 614-899-5209.
Website and E-mail Address
http://www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com/automation
[email protected]
If you have Internet capabilities, you also have access to technical support via our website at
http://www.cutlerhammer.eaton.com. The website includes technical notes, frequently asked questions,
release notes, and other technical documentation. This direct technical support connection also offers
you the ability to request assistance and exchange software files electronically.
Technical support messages and files can be sent to [email protected].

iv

D50 PLC User's Manual

Software Update Service

1-800-809-2772
FAX 614-899-4141
We also offer you the opportunity to take advantage of software upgrades, advanced software notices,
and special software promotions through our Software Update Service. When you register your
software, you will receive one-year of free or reduced-price upgrades along with all the other benefits
of membership, including 48-hour shipping of software upgrades. Contact the Software Update Service
at 1-800-809-2772 or fax 614-899-4141.
Repair and Upgrade Service

614-882-3282 ext. 7601


FAX 614-882-3414
Our well-equipped Customer Service department is ready to assist you with repairs, upgrades, and
spare parts services. If a situation arises where one of these services is needed, just call 614-882-3282
x7601 or fax 614-882-3414.
Product Ordering Service

614-882-3282
FAX 614-882-6532
Authorized Cutler-Hammer distributors may place product orders directly with our Order Processing
department by calling 614-882-3282 x406 or faxing 614-882-6532. For information on your local
distributor, call the Cutler-Hammer Tech Line.
Customer Support Center
1-800-356-1243
Authorized Cutler-Hammer distributors and Cutler-Hammer sales offices can get assistance for CutlerHammer standard and component product lines through the Customer Support Center. Call the
Customer Support Center for the following assistance:
1.

Stock availability, proof of shipment, or to place an order.

2.

Expedite an existing order.

3.

Product assistance and product price information.

4.

Product returns other than warranty returns.

For information on your local distributor or sales office, call the Cutler-Hammer Tech Line at 1-800809-2772.
Correspondence Address

Cutler-Hammer
173 Heatherdown Drive
Westerville, OH 43081

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Preface

About This Manual ................................................................................................................................................ii


Purpose...........................................................................................................................................................ii
What's Inside ..................................................................................................................................................ii
Support Services....................................................................................................................................................iii
Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction

Overview of the Manual......................................................................................................................................... 2


Features of the D320 PLC...................................................................................................................................... 2
Self Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................. 3
Large Program Memory................................................................................................................................. 3
Integrated 700mA Power Supply ................................................................................................................... 3
Battery-Free Program Backup........................................................................................................................ 3
I/O Module Support ....................................................................................................................................... 3
Peripheral Support.......................................................................................................................................... 4
System Installation Considerations ........................................................................................................................ 4
Environmental Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 4
Preventing PLC System Malfunctions ........................................................................................................... 4
Chapter 2: System Configuration

D50 PLC System Components............................................................................................................................... 6


D50 PLC Product List............................................................................................................................................ 7
D50 PLC Expansion Configurations...................................................................................................................... 9
Chapter 3: Product Specification

11

Environmental Operating Ranges ........................................................................................................................ 12


CPU Performance Specifications ......................................................................................................................... 12
Electrical Specifications....................................................................................................................................... 13
Power Supply Specifications........................................................................................................................ 13
24VDC Input Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 14
115VAC Input Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 15
Relay Output Specifications......................................................................................................................... 16
Transistor (24VDC) Output Specifications .................................................................................................. 17
SSR (115VAC) Output Specifications ......................................................................................................... 18
Name and Function of Controller Components.................................................................................................... 19
Chapter 4: Installation And Wiring

21

System Design Considerations............................................................................................................................. 22


Power Supply Wiring................................................................................................................................... 22
Interlock Circuit and Emergency Stop Circuit (Safety measures in system design) .................................... 22
Momentary Power Failure and Voltage Drop .............................................................................................. 23
System Installation Guidelines............................................................................................................................. 23
Environmental Usage Conditions................................................................................................................. 23
Control Panel Installation............................................................................................................................. 24
System Wiring and Installation Procedures ......................................................................................................... 26
Installation Dimensions................................................................................................................................ 26

vi

D320 PLC User's Manual

DIN Rail Mounting...................................................................................................................................... 26


Unit Installation Height ............................................................................................................................... 27
Expansion Cable Connection....................................................................................................................... 27
Power Supply Wiring .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Power wiring................................................................................................................................................ 28
Grounding.................................................................................................................................................... 28
Chapter 5: CPU Operation And Memory

29

Terminology ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
Overview of CPU Operation Mode ..................................................................................................................... 31
What Is the CPU Operation Mode? ............................................................................................................. 31
Run Mode (operating).................................................................................................................................. 31
Stop Mode ................................................................................................................................................... 31
Error Mode .................................................................................................................................................. 31
CPU Processing Procedure .................................................................................................................................. 32
Program Processing Procedure .................................................................................................................... 32
Introduction to Registers...................................................................................................................................... 33
Internal/External Address Designation ................................................................................................................ 33
Expression Example ............................................................................................................................................ 35
Double Mode Address Designation ..................................................................................................................... 36
Absolute Address Designation............................................................................................................................. 37
I/O Address Designation...................................................................................................................................... 38
Digital I/O Address Designation.................................................................................................................. 38
Analog I/O Address Designation ................................................................................................................. 38
Special Internal Addresses................................................................................................................................... 39
Timer/Counter (TC0-255) ................................................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 6: Instructions

47

Basic Instructions................................................................................................................................................. 48
Timer/Counter Instructions.................................................................................................................................. 49
Comparison Instructions ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instructions.................................................................................................. 50
Arithmetic Instructions ........................................................................................................................................ 51
Logic Instructions ................................................................................................................................................ 52
Rotation Instructions............................................................................................................................................ 52
Word Conversion Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 53
Bit Conversion Instructions ................................................................................................................................. 54
Transfer Instructions............................................................................................................................................ 55
Block Processing Instructions.............................................................................................................................. 56
How to Read the Description of Instructions....................................................................................................... 57
Instruction.................................................................................................................................................... 57
Ladder.......................................................................................................................................................... 57
Description................................................................................................................................................... 58
Example ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
Basic Instruction Details...................................................................................................................................... 59
STR, STN .................................................................................................................................................... 59
AND, ANN, (ADN)..................................................................................................................................... 60
OR, ORN ..................................................................................................................................................... 61
OUT, SET, RST........................................................................................................................................... 62
NOT............................................................................................................................................................. 63
STR DIF, STR DFN, AND DIF, AND DFN, OR DIF, OR DFN ............................................................... 64
ANB, ORB................................................................................................................................................... 65
MCS, MCR.................................................................................................................................................. 66

Table of Contents

vii

Timer/Counter Instruction Details........................................................................................................................ 67


TIM, SST ..................................................................................................................................................... 67
UC, DC......................................................................................................................................................... 69
UDC ............................................................................................................................................................. 71
Comparison Instruction Details............................................................................................................................ 73
=, <>, >, >=, <=, < ....................................................................................................................................... 73
Substitution, Increment, Decrement Instruction Details ...................................................................................... 74
LET, DLET .................................................................................................................................................. 74
INC, DINC, INCB, DINCB ......................................................................................................................... 75
DEC, DDEC, DECB, DDECB..................................................................................................................... 76
Arithmetic Instruction Details.............................................................................................................................. 77
ADD, DADD, ADDB, DADDB .................................................................................................................. 77
SUB, DSUB, SUBB, DSUBB...................................................................................................................... 79
MUL, DMUL, MULB, DMULB ................................................................................................................. 80
DIV, DDIV, DIVB, DDIVB ........................................................................................................................ 81
ADC, DADC, ADCB, DADCB ................................................................................................................... 82
SBC, DSBC, SBCB, DSBCB....................................................................................................................... 84
ABS, DABS, NEG, DNEG, NOT, DNOT ................................................................................................... 86
Logic Instruction Details...................................................................................................................................... 87
AND, DAND ............................................................................................................................................... 87
OR, DOR...................................................................................................................................................... 88
XOR, DXOR................................................................................................................................................ 89
XNR, DXNR................................................................................................................................................ 90
Rotation Instruction Details ................................................................................................................................. 91
RLC, DRLC ................................................................................................................................................. 91
RRC, DRRC................................................................................................................................................. 92
ROL, DROL................................................................................................................................................. 93
ROR, DROR ................................................................................................................................................ 95
SHL, DSHL.................................................................................................................................................. 96
SHR, DSHR ................................................................................................................................................. 98
Word Conversion Instruction Details................................................................................................................... 99
BCD, DBCD, BIN, DBIN............................................................................................................................ 99
XCHG, DXCHG ........................................................................................................................................ 100
SEG ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
ENCO, DECO ............................................................................................................................................ 102
DIS, UNI .................................................................................................................................................... 104
Bit Conversion Instruction Details ..................................................................................................................... 106
BSET, BRST, BNOT, BTST ..................................................................................................................... 106
SUM........................................................................................................................................................... 108
SC, RC, CC ................................................................................................................................................ 109
Transfer Instruction Details................................................................................................................................ 110
LDR, DLDR............................................................................................................................................... 110
STO, DSTO................................................................................................................................................ 112
MOV, FMOV............................................................................................................................................. 114
BMOV, BFMV .......................................................................................................................................... 116
Block Processing Instruction Details ................................................................................................................. 117
FOR, DFOR, NEXT................................................................................................................................... 117
JMP, LBL................................................................................................................................................... 119
JMPS, JMPE .............................................................................................................................................. 120
CALL, SBR, RET ...................................................................................................................................... 122
WAT .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
END ........................................................................................................................................................... 125

viii

D320 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 7: Testing And Troubleshooting

127

Test Precautions................................................................................................................................................. 128


System Checks................................................................................................................................................... 128
Testing Procedures............................................................................................................................................. 130
Correcting Errors ............................................................................................................................................... 132
System Check ............................................................................................................................................ 132
Power Supply Check.................................................................................................................................. 133
Run Check ................................................................................................................................................. 134
Error Check................................................................................................................................................ 135
I/O Check................................................................................................................................................... 136
Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection Tables....................................................................................... 138
Periodic Inspection and Preventive Maintenance ...................................................................................... 141
Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

143

Noise Occurrence............................................................................................................................................... 144


Types of Noise........................................................................................................................................... 144
Electrical Noise Fundamental Definitions ................................................................................................. 144
Sources of Noise ........................................................................................................................................ 145
Advised Installation Practices............................................................................................................................ 146
Shield the PLC........................................................................................................................................... 146
Proper Cable Selection .............................................................................................................................. 146
Ground the PLC......................................................................................................................................... 146
Isolation and Filtering Techniques..................................................................................................................... 147
Isolation ..................................................................................................................................................... 147
Filters ......................................................................................................................................................... 148
Methods of Handling Large Voltage Spikes Such as Lightning........................................................................ 149
Surge Absorber .......................................................................................................................................... 149
Burying Wire ............................................................................................................................................. 149
Shielding Cabling .............................................................................................................................................. 150
Methods to Handle I/O Inductive Loads............................................................................................................ 151
Warning ............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................. 154
Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

155

Communication Rules ....................................................................................................................................... 156


Communication Environment.................................................................................................................... 156
Communication Protocol ................................................................................................................................... 156
Step 1Query (Q)..................................................................................................................................... 156
Step 2Query Acknowledge (QA)........................................................................................................... 156
Step 3Response Request (RR) ............................................................................................................... 156
Step 4Response (R)................................................................................................................................ 156
Step 5Repeated Response ...................................................................................................................... 157
Communications Delay.............................................................................................................................. 157
Example ..................................................................................................................................................... 157
CPU ID ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
Function Codes Included in the Query ...................................................................................................... 158
Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC) ........................................................................................................ 159
The Structure of the Communications Frame .................................................................................................... 160
Read Bits.................................................................................................................................................... 161
Write Bits................................................................................................................................................... 162
Read Words ............................................................................................................................................... 163
Write Words .............................................................................................................................................. 164

Table of Contents

ix

Read Bits and Words.................................................................................................................................. 165


Write Bits and Words................................................................................................................................. 166
Communication Program Example .................................................................................................................... 167
Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

173

Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 174
High Speed Counter ................................................................................................................................... 174
Configurable Input Response Delay........................................................................................................... 174
Pulse Catch Input ....................................................................................................................................... 174
Pulse Output............................................................................................................................................... 174
Special I/O Function Registers........................................................................................................................... 175
High Speed Counter ........................................................................................................................................... 176
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 176
Bit Registers............................................................................................................................................... 177
Programming Procedure............................................................................................................................. 178
Configurable Input Response Delay................................................................................................................... 179
Pulse Catch Input ............................................................................................................................................... 180
Pulse Output....................................................................................................................................................... 181
Register Descriptions ................................................................................................................................. 181
Pulse Mode Programming Procedure......................................................................................................... 183
PWM Mode Programming Procedure........................................................................................................ 184
Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

185

Overview............................................................................................................................................................ 186
Specifications ..................................................................................................................................................... 186
Part Descriptions ................................................................................................................................................ 187
Instruction LEDs....................................................................................................................................... 187
Status LEDs .............................................................................................................................................. 187
Register LEDs........................................................................................................................................... 188
Address/Data LED Display........................................................................................................................ 188
Instruction Keys ......................................................................................................................................... 188
Function Keys ............................................................................................................................................ 189
Operating Procedures ......................................................................................................................................... 190
Clear Program ............................................................................................................................................ 191
Add Instruction........................................................................................................................................... 192
Monitor Program........................................................................................................................................ 193
Edit Program .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Error Checking ........................................................................................................................................... 200
Monitor I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 201
Run/Stop PLC ............................................................................................................................................ 204
Instruction Codes ............................................................................................................................................... 205
Basic Instructions ....................................................................................................................................... 205
Advanced Instructions................................................................................................................................ 206
Programming Examples ..................................................................................................................................... 208
Example 1 Basic Instructions .................................................................................................................. 208
Example 2 Timer Instructions ................................................................................................................. 210
Example 3 Counter Instructions .............................................................................................................. 211
Example 4 Comparison/Advanced Instructions ...................................................................................... 213

D320 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction

Introduction

Welcome to the D50 PLC User's Manual. The D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a small
application industrial controller, designed to provide maximum flexibility at a minimum cost. This
manual will give you a complete understanding of how to install and program the D50 PLC. It also
includes complete product specifications, and a description of the various products that work with the
D50 PLC.
This chapter contains:

An overview of this manual

The features of the D50 PLC

System installation considerations

D50 PLC User's Manual

Overview of the Manual


This manual contains the following information:

Chapter 1 introduces the D50 PLC by describing its features and discussing installation
considerations.

Chapter 2 discusses various system configurations and products that can be used with the D50
PLC.

Chapter 3 gives performance specifications and operating ranges of the CPU and the D50
series products.

Chapter 4 describes installation and wiring guidelines and procedures including system design
considerations, wiring the power supply, and connecting the PLC to a PC.

Chapter 5 introduces many concepts you need to know to program the D50 PLC including
terminology, how the registers are used, different types of address designations, and the CPU
processing procedure.

Chapter 6 presents detailed information on the Instruction Set that is used by the D50 PLC.

Chapter 7 discusses testing and troubleshooting procedures.

Chapter 8 describes electrical interference or noise and the ways you can reduce its influence.

Appendix A gives rules and procedures for D50 PLC communication.

Appendix B details the configuration and operation of the integrated special I/O functions of
the D50 PLC, including High Speed counters, Pulse Output, and adjustable inputs.

Appendix C describes mnemonic programming and the use of the D50 Pocket Editor.

Features of the D50 PLC


The D50 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) is a versatile and dependable industrial controller,
designed to handle a wide range of small control applications to improve productivity and reduce
operating costs. This micro or brick PLC provides high-speed processing of user control programs,
and comes with a complete line of expansion I/O modules, including digital and analog. These features
combine to provide the right solution for a multitude of applications.

The D50 PLC is designed for small-sized control applications that require from 1 to 56
control points, high-speed count or analog capability, and advanced functionality.

The D50 PLC is built to simplify operation, maintenance, and repair with its modular design.

I/O flexibility is achieved through the wide variety of available digital and analog modules,
covering a broad range of voltage and current ratings.

The D50 PLC has many additional features that combine to make it the ideal choice for many control
applications.

Chapter 1: Introduction

Self Diagnostics
When placed in the Run mode, the D50 PLC performs startup self-diagnostics and error-checking on
the processor, control program, and I/O system. Error status information is stored internally, providing
for quick and easy troubleshooting of system and programming errors.

Large Program Memory


Sufficient program capacity is furnished for even the most demanding applications. Internal program
memory handles up to 2048 separate control steps.

Integrated 700mA Power Supply


The AC-powered D50 PLC controller provides up to 700mA of 24VDC output power. This can
eliminate the need for an additional power supply for standard 24VDC control power requirements.

Battery-Free Program Backup


An EEPROM is used to provide battery-free permanent program and data storage.

I/O Module Support


The D50 PLC I/O expansion module line includes complete coverage of all major standard I/O
requirements. Digital inputs can be of 24 VDC or 115 VAC type, while digital outputs can be 24 VDC
transistor, 115VAC SSR, or relay type. Analog support is available for voltage and current A/D and
D/A.

Peripheral Support
The D50 PLC has two program loader software packages available for use on standard PCs: the DOSbased GPC5, and the Windows-based WinGPC. These packages provide advanced programming,
monitoring, editing, and troubleshooting for the D50 PLC. A dedicated hand-held programmer is also
available for harsh environments. Cutler-Hammer also offers a complete line of Operator Interface
products and HMI software packages compatible with the D50 PLC.
Note: When this manual uses the term GPC, either GPC5 or WinGPC can be used.

D50 PLC User's Manual

System Installation Considerations


Environmental Considerations
The D50 PLC system should never be installed under the following environmental conditions:
1.

Ambient temperature outside the range of 0 to 55C (32 to 131F).

2.

Direct sunlight.

3.

Humidity outside the range of 20% to 90%.

4.

Altitudes greater than 10,000 ft. (3,000 m).

5.

Corrosive or dusty air.

6.

High voltage, high magnetics, or high electromagnetic waves.

7.

Locations subject to direct impact greater than 10G or vibrations greater than 1G @ 57-2000
Hz.

Preventing PLC System Malfunctions


1.

Use an isolation transformer and line filter on the incoming power to the PLC when in the
vicinity of equipment using or producing high current, high voltage, or large magnetic fields.

2.

Separate the main PLC power line ground from all other power grounds. Always use triplegrounding.

3.

Do not exceed the current and power rating of the external 24 VDC provided by the D50
power supply.

4.

Avoid system faults due to programming errors by reading and fully understanding this
system manual and the PLC instruction set.

5.

Perform regular preventive maintenance on installed systems, checking devices and wiring for
potential breakdowns and failures.

Chapter 2: System Configuration

System Configuration

This chapter provides information on the various products that are available for the D50 PLC. It
includes diagrams that show the D50 PLC system components and expansion configurations.
This chapter contains:

Information about the D50 PLC system components

Descriptions of the line of D50 PLC products

The D50 PLC expansion configurations

D50 PLC User's Manual

D50 PLC System Components

RS232
RS485

Programming Cable
D50CBL10

RS232/485
Adapter
D50CPM485

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50

5
IN

GPC5/WinGPC
Program Loader
Software

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

5
IN

+24VDC

NC

IN

NC

NC

D50 Programmable Controller

Programmable Controller

IN

ERR
RUN
STOP

OUT

Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

OUT
3

D50 Controller

GND
NC

NC

OUT
C

NC

NC

NC

NC

Cutler-Hammer

OUT
0

NC

ANALOG OUTPUT

Cutler-Hammer

OUT
0

NC

CONVERSION
ERROR

RUN
IN
OUT

NC

D50 Series

OUT
3

Digital Expander
(up to 3)

NC
4

NC

NC

CH0

NC
I

CH1
G

CH0
G

CH1
G

Analog Expander
(up to 2)

Chapter 2: System Configuration

D50 PLC Product List


Controllers
Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

Controller

D50CR14

115/230VAC Power, 24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs

D50CRA14

115/230VAC Power, 115VAC Inputs, Relay Outputs

D50CD14

115/230VAC Power, 24VDC Inputs, 24VDC Outputs

All controllers
have 8 digital
inputs and 6
digital outputs.

D50CAA14

115/230VAC Power, 115VAC Inputs, 115VAC Outputs

D50DCR14

24VDC Power, 24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs

D50DCD14

24VDC Power, 24VDC Inputs, 24VDC Outputs

Digital I/O Expansion


Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

Digital
Expander

D50ER14

24VDC Inputs, Relay Outputs

D50ERA14

115VAC Inputs, Relay Outputs

D50ED14

24VDC inputs, 24VDC Outputs

All expanders
have 8 digital
inputs and 6
digital outputs.

D50EAA14

115VAC inputs, 115VAC Outputs

Analog I/O Expansion


Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

Analog
Expander

D50AIM410V

0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, or 4-20mA Analog Inputs

4 Channels

D50AOM210V

0-10VDC, 0-5VDC, or 4-20mA Analog Outputs

2 Channels

Analog/Frequency Converters
Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

A/F Converter

48160-450

Convert Analog 0-10VDC input signal to 0-10kHz


Frequency input to D50 PLC

Maximum of 2 may
be used per D50

F/A Converter

48160-480

Convert Pulse output from D50 PLC into a 0-10VDC Maximum of 1 may
or 4-20mA analog output signal
be used per D50

D50 PLC User's Manual

Programming Equipment
Name

Catalog #

Handheld
Program
Loader

D320PGM500

Product Description

Remarks

Write, edit, monitor program (mnemonic only)

Does not include


cable

Memory BACK-UP function


Backlit LCD screen
Supports RS-232C/485 communication

Name

Catalog #

Also supports the


D300/D320 PLCs.

Product Description

Remarks

Write, edit, monitor program (mnemonic only)

Includes cable

Pocket Editor

D50PGM10

Name

Catalog #

Product Description

GPC5 (DOS)

D50CCS35

WinGPC
(Windows)

D50WINCS35

Software for computer which provides programming, For MS-DOS


monitoring, uploading, downloading, online editing,
For Windows 3.1,
error checking, PLC status monitoring, and other
95, 98, NT
troubleshooting and diagnostic features.

Supports RS485 communication


Remarks

Note: When this manual uses the term GPC, either GPC5 or WinGPC can be used.
Programming Cables
Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

RS232C/485
Cable

D50CBL10

Handheld Program Loader (PGM500)

6 ft (2 m)

For IBM-PC communication (GPC)

Manuals
Name

Catalog #

Product Description

Remarks

D50 Hardware
Manual

D50SA122

Installation and programming manual for the D50 Must be ordered


PLC.
separately

Analog Expander
Manual

D50SA495

Configuration and operation manual for the


D50AIM410V and D50AOM210V analog I/O.

GPC5 Manual

D50SA464

Software Instruction manual for GPC5

WinGPC Manual

D50SA467

Software Instruction manual for WinGPC

Must be ordered
separately

Chapter 2: System Configuration

D50 PLC Expansion Configurations

All digital I/O modules, both controller and expander, contain 14 I/O points 8 digital inputs,
and 6 digital outputs.

Up to 3 digital expansion units can be added to the controller.

Up to 2 analog expansion units can be added to the controller. These can be either two analog
input modules, two analog output modules, or one of each.

Any type of digital and analog expansion unit can be mixed and matched as required for the
application.

The digital and analog expansion units may be added in any order.

A maximum of 56 digital points and 8 analog channels are available. This is achieved by
using three digital expansion units, and two analog input expansion units.

10

D50 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 3: Product Specification

Product Specification

This chapter outlines the environmental conditions for D50 PLC operation and the performance
specifications and component functions of the controller.
This chapter discusses:

The environmental operating ranges for the D50 Series products

The performance specifications of the controller and expansion modules

The name and function of the controller components

11

12

D50 PLC User's Manual

Environmental Operating Ranges


Item

Specifications

Ambient
temperature

Operating temp. 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)


Storage temp.

-10 to 75C (14.0 to 167F)

Ambient
humidity

Operating

20% to 90% RH (Non-condensing)

Storage

10% to 90% RH (Non-condensing)

Breakdown voltage

Between AC external terminal and earth, AC 1500 V for 1 min.

Insulation resistance

Min. 20Mohms, between AC external terminal and earth, 500 VDC.

Vibration resistance

16.7Hz, amplitude 3 mm, each direction of X, Y, Z for 2 hours.

Impact resistance

10G for 2 hours, X, Y, Z each direction.

Noise resistance

1500 Vp-p pulse width 50 ns, 1 s (according to noise simulator method)

Usage condition

No corrosive gas or severe dust conditions.

Controller Performance Specifications


Control method

Program storage, Repeat calculation method

External I/O

Digital

Onboard 14 points; Max. 56 points

Analog

Max. 8 Input Channels, or4 Output Channels, or 4 In/2 Out

Basic instruction

25 types

Instruction

Application instruction

About 130 types

Process
speed

Basic instruction

2 to 4 S/step

Program capacity

Memory
capacity

Special
functions

2k steps (1 step = 1 word) (1k step = 1,024 steps)

Local I/O (R)

R000.0 to R03.7 (32 Input); R015.0 to R18.5 (24 Output)

Special I/O (R)

R004 to R14; R19 to R29

Internal contact (M)

M000.0 to M31.15 (512 points, 32 words)

Retentive internal
contact (K)

K000.0 to K15.15 (256 points, 16 words)

System flags (F)

F000.0 to F001.15 (32 points)

Timer/Counter (TC or
TIM)

256 channels (timer + counter), set point: 0 to 65,535


Timer: 0.01 second:
TC000 to TC015 (16 channels)
0.1 second:
TC016 to TC255 (240 channels)
counter:
TC000 to TC255 (256 channels)

Data word (W)

W0000 to W255 (256 words)

System registers
(W, SR)

SR000 to SR255 (256 words)

High-speed Counter

2 channel (24bit up/down; single phase 10kHz, dual-phase 5kHz)

Pulse Output

1 point (20Hz to 5kHz); 24VDC Transistor output units only

Input Delay

0 to 64msec adjustable

Pulse Catch Input

150sec minimum width

Comm. Port Interface

RS485 Multidrop at 9600bps

Chapter 3: Product Specification

Electrical Specifications
Power Supply Specifications
Internal Circuit Diagram

FUSE

AC

Internal
Circuit

85-264V

FG

Wiring Diagram
24VDC Out

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50
0

IN

5
IN

Programmable Controller
1

RUN

ERR

OUT

RUN
STOP

Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

OUT
0

OUT
3

85-264VAC In

Specifications
Voltage Input

AC Models: 85-264VAC; DC Models: 20-28VDC

AC Frequency

47-63Hz

Current Consumption

Max. 0.6A

Output Power

24VDC @ 700mA max.

13

14

D50 PLC User's Manual

24VDC Input Specifications


Internal Circuit Diagram
COM

INPUT

Wiring Diagram
Current
Sinking
Devices

Current
Sourcing
Devices

24VDC
+

DC 24V

OUT

24VDC
+

1
IN

Specifications
Rated Voltage

12 to 24VDC

Operating Voltage Range

9 to 30VDC

Input Resistance

3.3 k

Input Delay Time


Number of Inputs

Off  On

Less than 10ms

On  Off

Less than 10ms


8 points

Points per Common

4 points/common

Isolation

Photocoupler

5
IN

Chapter 3: Product Specification

115VAC Input Specifications


Internal Circuit Diagram
COM

INPUT

Wiring Diagram
110VAC

DC 24V
OUT

1
IN

Specifications
Rated Voltage

110VAC

Operating Voltage Range

85 to 132VAC

Input Current

5mA to 14mA

Operating Voltage
Input Delay Time

Min. On

85VAC

Max. Off

30VAC

Off  On

Less than 12ms

On  Off

Less than 12ms

Number of Inputs

8 points

Points per Common

4 points/common

Isolation

Photocoupler

5
IN

15

16

D50 PLC User's Manual

Relay Output Specifications


Internal Circuit Diagram

+24VDC

24VDC
GND

COM

OUT

LOAD

OUT
3

LOAD

OUT
0

LOAD

OUT
C

LOAD

GND

LOAD

IN 100-240V

LOAD

Wiring Diagram

Specifications
Rated Voltage

110/220VAC; 30VDC

Operating Voltage Range

85 to 132VAC

Electrical Life

200,000 operations @ rated current

Mechanical Life

10M operations

Max. Load Current


Min. Load Current
Output Delay Time

Per Output

2A

Per Common

4A

Per Output

30mA

Off  On

Less than 10ms

On  Off

Less than 10ms

Number of Outputs

6 points

Points per Common

2 Isolated, 1 group of 4 points/common

Isolation

Photocoupler

Chapter 3: Product Specification

Transistor (24VDC) Output Specifications


Internal Circuit Diagram

COM

OUT

GND

24VDC

OUT
3

LOAD

LOAD

OUT
0

LOAD

OUT
C

LOAD

GND

LOAD

IN 100-240V

LOAD

Wiring Diagram

Specifications
Rated Voltage

24VDC

Operating Voltage Range

5 to 27VDC

Max. Load Current


Min. Load Current
Output Delay Time

Per Output

0.5A

Per Common

4A

Per Output

10mA

Off  On

Less than 1ms

On  Off

Less than 1ms

Number of Outputs

6 points

Points per Common

2 Isolated, 1 group of 4 points/common

Isolation

Photocoupler

17

18

D50 PLC User's Manual

SSR (115/230VAC) Output Specifications


Internal Circuit Diagram
OUT

COM

OUT
3

LOAD

LOAD

OUT
0

LOAD

LOAD

OUT

GND

LOAD

IN 100-240V

LOAD

Wiring Diagram

Specifications
Rated Voltage

110/220VAC

Operating Voltage Range


Max. Load Current
Min. Load Current
Output Delay Time
Number of Outputs

85 to 132VAC

Per Output

0.5A

Per Common

3A

Per Output

50mA

Off  On

Less than 5ms

On  Off

Less than 12ms


6 points

Points per Common

2 Isolated, 1 group of 4 points/common

Isolation

Photocoupler

Chapter 3: Product Specification

19

Name and Function of Controller Components

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50

IN

Programmable Controller
RUN

IN

Status LEDs

ERR

OUT

RUN
STOP

I/O Expansion Port


Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

OUT
0

OUT
3

Mode Switch
RS485 Communication Port
The mode switch has the following settings:
State

Function

RUN

CPU set in Run or Stop/Program Override mode.

PROG.

CPU set in Stop/Program mode.

The Status LEDs provide the following information:


LED

Color

RUN

Green

ERROR

Red

Function
On when the CPU is in Run mode.
Flashing when the CPU is in Stop/Program mode.
On when CPU has an error.

The I/O Expansion Port supplies a 10-pin connector for adding digital and/or analog expansion
modules to the base controller.
The RS485 Communication Port supports an RS485 connection for programming, configuring, and
monitoring the PLC. For communication with most RS232 peripherals, such as a personal computer,
an RS232/485 converter must be used. When placed on an RS485 network with other D50, D300, or
D320 PLCs, the ends of the network should be properly terminated with 120 Ohm resistors to prevent
communication errors due to noise and reflections on the transmission line.

20

D50 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Installation and Wiring

This chapter provides considerations and information on installing and wiring the D50 PLC.
Diagrams are included to illustrate the installation procedures.
This chapter contains:

System design considerations

System installation guidelines

System wiring and installation procedures

21

22

D50 PLC User's Manual

System Design Considerations


Power Supply Wiring
Physical and Electrical Isolation of Power Supplies
When wiring the PLC, external control I/O, and large power equipment such as motors, each system
should be electrically separated as shown:
Power
Device

Main power
source

External
I/O device

PLC
Isolation transformer

Interlock Circuit and Emergency Stop Circuit (Safety measures in


system design)
In any PLC application, abnormal and potentially dangerous operation can occur. These system
malfunctions may result from power surges, brownouts, blackouts, shorted or opened I/O devices, or
any type of system component failure. Any errors of the PLC, the external power source, and/or
external devices can cause a system malfunction. The potentially dangerous effects of these errors on
the whole system can be prevented with proper safety precautions. The use of properly designed safety
circuits external to the PLC will protect against both equipment damage and human injury.

Interlock Circuit
An interlock circuit can control and prevent problems such as those caused by unexpected or reversed
operation of a motor. Install the interlock circuit external to the PLC control wiring and circuitry.

Emergency Stop Circuit


Every industrial control application involving electrical or moving parts should be wired with an
emergency stop circuit. The emergency stop circuit turns off the power immediately to all output
devices in the system. The emergency stop circuit should provide independent power cutoff from the
PLC system.

Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

23

Power-Up Sequence
In a properly designed control system, the default Off state of the system is the safe state, in which no
machinery is operating. Before the PLC is powered-up, line power and control power are applied to the
system. Once the system is powered up in the safe/default state, the PLC is powered up and begins
system control. As necessary, the control system should be modified to ensure the proper delayed
startup to prevent problems on power-up.
For example: 1) Run the PLC after turning on the power
2) Use an external or internal timer to delay the operation of the PLC.

Momentary Power Failure and Voltage Drop


Momentary Power Failure
The D50 PLC will ride through momentary power failures of 10 msec or less. The PLC will stop and
turn off its outputs if a momentary power failure greater than 20 msec occurs. For momentary power
failures between 10 msec and 20 msec, the PLC's operation depends on circumstances at that time, and
is not defined. The control system should be designed specifically to ensure safe operation for these
potential power-loss conditions.

Voltage Drop (Brownouts)


The PLC will stop and turn off its outputs if the PLC 's power supply voltage drops below the
allowable fluctuating voltage range (see specifications for power supply units).

CAUTION: Steps should be taken to prevent damage to the PLC system through fluctuating

voltages, brownouts, blackouts, shorts, ground faults, or other power supply


failures. For example, you may need to apply an isolation transformer before the
incoming PLC power supply and/or I/O control wiring.

System Installation Guidelines


Environmental Usage Conditions
Avoid the Following Environments:

Ambient temperature outside the range of 0 to 55C (32 to 131F).

Humidity levels outside the range of 20% to 90%.

Abrupt temperature variations which lead to the formation of dew.

Presence of corrosive or flammable gases.

Presence of dense dust, salt, and iron concentrations.

Presence of corrosive solutions such as benzene, thinner, alcohol, ammonia and caustic soda.

D50 PLC User's Manual

Locations subject to direct impact greater than 10 G or vibrations greater than 1 G @


57-2000 Hz.

Direct sunlight.

Presence of water, oil, and other chemicals.

Electrical Noise Considerations

Do not install near high-tension wires, high-voltage devices, power cables, power devices,
and other devices which generate large power surges or electromagnetic fields when starting
and stopping.

Do not place near wireless communications devices with transceivers, such as walkie talkies,
cellular phones, or shortwave radios.

Control Panel Installation


Leave enough space at the top of unit from other devices or wiring ducts to allow ventilation
space and easy replacement and wiring of the unit (see the following diagrams).

Do not mount the PLC system rotated vertically, or facing up or down. This will prevent
proper air cooling of the PLC CPU, which will cause abnormal overheating inside the PLC
(see the following diagrams).

IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

OUT
3

C
1
OUT
C

5
4
3

0
OUT
C
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT

Cutler-Hammer

RUN
STOP

ERR

RUN
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

IN

D50

Programmable Controller

5
IN
4
C
3
2
1
IN
0
C
OU T

OUT
0

OUT
3

DC 24V

24

Incorrect: Horizontal Mounting

Incorrect: Vertical Mounting

Avoid installation over heat generating equipment such as heaters, transformers, and power
resistors.

Avoid radiation noise by leaving a minimum distance of 4 inches (100 mm) from the surface
of each unit to the power cable, and the noise-generating device (motor starter, solenoid, etc.).

Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

Wiring Duct, device,


or cabinet wall
At least 2 in. (50mm)
DC 24V

OUT

IN

D50

DC 24V

IN

1
IN

OUT

D50

Programmable Controller

5
IN

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50

Programmable Controller

5
IN

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50

Programmable Controller

5
IN

Programmable Controller

RU N
0

IN

IN

ER R

OUT

RU N
STOP

OUT

Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

IN
OUT

Cutler-Hammer

OUT
0

OUT
3

GND
NC

NC

OUT
C

IN
OUT

Cutler-Hammer

OUT
0

OUT
3

GND
4

NC

NC

OUT
C

Cutler-Hammer

OUT
0

OUT
3

GND
4

NC

NC

OUT
C

OUT
0

OUT
3

At least 2 in. (50mm)

Leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) from the duct or other devices:

To prevent overheating.

For easy replacement and wiring of the unit.

When installing the PLC in a cabinet or enclosure:

Leave 4 inches (100 mm) or more from the front surface of unit.

This area in front of the PLC helps to avoid the effects of emission, noise, and heat.

The additional space also allows for easier connection to the programming port as needed.

25

26

D50 PLC User's Manual

System Wiring and Installation Procedures


Installation Dimensions
0.197 (5mm) Dia.
2 Holes

1.97
(50mm)
3.15
(80mm)

0.59
(15mm)
3.58
(91mm)
3.93
(100mm)

DIN Rail Mounting


Attachment

Removal

2
1

Chapter 4: Installation and Wiring

27

Unit Installation Height


The depth of the D50 PLC is 3 inches (76 mm) when the unit is installed on DIN rail. When the
communication cable is connected and the unit is installed in an enclosure, additional space is required.
The minimum installation sizes are given in the following diagram.

Expansion Cable Connection


Connecting the Expansion Cable

The expansion cable is connected between the I/O expansion ports on the controller and
expander units.

The expansion cable is keyed to prevent incorrect wiring, with Pin 1 at the top of the
connector.

The connector can be up to 12 in length for mounting the expansion unit above, below, or
farther away from the controller. A 2.5 cable is included with each expansion unit. The
following table lists the parts required to construct a longer cable.

Expansion Cable Components


Part

Description

AMP #746286-1

10-socket socket connectors (2)

AMP #499252-5

Strain relief connectors (2) for socket connectors above

Ribbon cable

28AWG stranded wire, 0.050 spacing 10 conductor w/ PVC insulation, 105deg. C, wire #1
color-coded

28

D50 PLC User's Manual

Power Supply Wiring


Power wiring

When connecting the power cable:


To reduce power loss in the wiring, use at least 14 AWG (2 mm) cable.
To reduce the effect of noise, use twisted, shielded cable.

An isolation transformer can be used to further reduce noise and to prevent failures from
power problems such as ground faults.

Grounding

In normal low-noise environments such as closed-room control cabinets, it is possible to


operate the PLC without frame grounding. However, it is necessary to ground the PLC for
noisy environments, and is recommended for all installations regardless of electronic noise
levels.

For the frame ground, use a cable of at least 14 AWG (2 mm) in size. The ground should be
exclusive to the PLC. Sharing the ground connection with other devices can cause problems
due to ground loops and current feedback.
Other
device

PLC

Right

PLC

Other
device

Wrong

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

CPU Operation and Memory

This chapter provides you with information about memory addresses and the CPU operation. It
includes a terminology section and an overview of registers.
This chapter discusses:

The terminology used in the D50 PLC manual

CPU operation and processing

Internal/external address designation

Special function internal addresses

29

30

D50 PLC User's Manual

Terminology
This section introduces some terminology you should know.
1.

Address (register)
Address refers to the location of memory being used. It can refer to the external input/output
module or internal memory. An address is categorized into 1 bit, 16 bit (word), or 32 bit
(double word).

2.

Bit
A bit is the minimum unit required for calculation. It can be either On (1) or Off (0).

3.

Byte
A byte is made up of 8 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 255. In base 16, or hexadecimal,
a byte can be expressed as 0 to FF. You cannot have a value greater than 255 when using one
byte.

4.

Word
A word is made of 16 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 65,535. In base 16 a word can be
expressed as 0 to FFFF.

5.

Double Word
A double word is made of 32 bits. It can hold data values from 0 to 4,294,976,295. In base 16
a double word can be expressed as 0 to FFFFFFFF. In the D50, a double word is made up of
two consecutive word addresses.

6.

Scan Time
The CPU follows a procedure in which it 1) reads the inputs, 2) processes the ladder program,
and 3) updates the outputs. It continually repeats this process. This 3-step process is called a
scan, and the time it takes to complete this process is the scan time. In a typical PLC
application, most of the scan time is used to process the program. When programming, keep
in mind that the scan time will increase as you increase the number of inputs and outputs
and/or the size of the program.

7.

Edge
An edge is defined as the point when an input changes state. For example, a rising edge
occurs during the very first scan after the input has changed from Off to On. A falling edge
occurs after the input has changed from On to Off.

8.

Hex (Hexadecimal)
A hexadecimal number is a value expressed in Base 16. Base 16 values consist of digits from
0 to F. In a byte, word, or double word, each set of 4 bits corresponds to a single hex digit.
For example, the binary value 01001111 would correspond to the hex value 4F, and a decimal
value of 79. A hex value is designated by the use of the symbol $ in front of the value (i.e.
$4F is the hex value 4F).

8.

BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)


BCD is used to express a decimal digit (0 to 9) using 4 bits. Conversion of BCD values can be
done in hexadecimal calculations. For example, the BCD representation of decimal 27 would
be two sets of 4 bits: 0010 0111.

9.

EEPROM
EEPROM is electronically erasable and programmable memory that retains its data even
through loss of power. The PLC program is stored in EEPROM and will be retained when
power is off.

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

31

10. GPC
Graphic Programming Console. Cutler-Hammer offers two program loader software packages
for programming, monitoring, and configuring the D50 PLC. The DOS-based package is
GPC5, the Windows-based package is WinGPC. In this manual, GPC is used to refer to
either of these programs.

Overview of CPU Operation Mode


What Is the CPU Operation Mode?
The CPU has an external RUN/STOP switch. The PLC performs a system check that determines the
position of the switch. The switch position determines which operating mode the PLC is in. It can be in
Run, Stop, or Error mode.

Run Mode (operating)


The D50 PLC reads the external input signals and executes the user program stored in RAM. The
external outputs are updated every scan according to program results. When the switch is in Run
Mode, the user can also use the GPC program loader software to switch between the RUN and STOP
states.

Stop Mode
The user program is stopped and the external outputs are turned Off. In the Stop mode, you can
correct, delete, and transfer the program.

Error Mode
The Error mode occurs when the D50 PLC finds an error after running the self-diagnostics. When an
error occurs, the CPU stops program operation and turns off all external outputs. When the Error mode
occurs, do one of the following:

Check the error code and take appropriate measures, then change power from Off to On.

Switch the mode switch back to the STOP position. When the switch is returned to RUN the
program and data are re-initialized (excluding the retentive data).

32

D50 PLC User's Manual

CPU Processing Procedure


Program Processing Procedure
1. Mandatory
input/output

2. Process
input/output

1 scan
time
3. Watchdog
time 0
4. Program
analysis

5. Peripheral device
signal processing

The diagram above indicates the PLC program processing procedure. The CPU regularly repeats
procedure 1 through 5. This cycle is called 1 scan time.
1.

Mandatory input/output processing


The internal force table is applied to internal/external I/O, turning forced I/O On or Off.

2.

Input/output processing
Preserves the On/Off state of the external I/O and uses it as input in the next scan. (For
accurate processing, input should continue for more than 1 scan time.) The processed program
outputs are sent from the internal memory to the external modules.

3.

Watchdog time initialization


The watchdog elapsed time value is set to 0. This value is the watchdog calculation point until
the next scan.

4.

Program analysis
Executes the program from its first step to its final step and stores the internal/external output
in the working RAM.

5.

Peripheral device signal processing


Stores data from communications module or peripheral device in the internal memory.

The following illustration shows the difference between the relay board and PLC sequence processing.
The relay carries out all sequences simultaneously while the PLC processes sequentially throughout
the program.
LS1

LS2

R0.1
X1
M0.0

X1
X1

T1

M0.0
T1
TC0
Y1

Processing of relay sequence


(parallel process)

R0.2

M0.0
(OUT)

TIM CH = 0
V = 100
R15.0
(OUT)

Processing of PLC program


(serial process)

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

33

Introduction to Registers
The D50 PLC has a series of registers for storing data. Different registers store different types of data.
1.

R (Relay) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)


Indicates the internal memory address which is directly linked with the real-world external
input/output module. The address and number of R registers are predefined for the controller
and expansion module I/O.

2.

M (Memory) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)


An internal bit memory address which supports relay logic operations. Can also be used as a
byte or word variable for general calculations and programs. M Registers are non-retentive
when the power of the PLC is Off or the CPU has stopped, the register value is reset to 0.

3.

W (Word) register (Can be byte or word)


Used for general calculations, data storage, and recipe values. Values are cleared after the
power is turned off, or by new program download.

4.

K (Keep) register (Can be bit, byte, or word)


Same usage as M registers. The K Registers are retentivethe value is preserved when the
power is turned off.

5.

F (Flag) register (Can only be bit)


These bit registers provide special application specific functions to the programmer of the
PLC. They are also used as diagnostic and system control bits, providing Run/Stop control of
the PLC and other system conditions.

Each type of register is used for a variety of purposes. The register used will be determined by the type
of function being performed.
1.

When a calculation or input value exceeds 255 ($FF), use double mode instructions which can
store and calculate values up to 65,535 in the K, M, R, and W registers..

2.

When a value needs to be stored even through a loss of system power, use the K area. The K
area is preserved unless specifically erased. The W area is erased by program downloads or
loss of power.

3.

For bit operations, such as setting, resetting, shifting, or rotating use the M, K, or R registers.
You cannot perform bit operations on W registers.

4.

The Set Value of timers and counters is stored in a special area of the W registers, W2048 to
W2303. These values can also be addressed using register type SV. The Set Values are then
referenced as SV000 to SV255.

5.

The Present Value of timers and counters is stored above the Set Values in the W registers,
from W2304 to W2559. These values can also be addressed using the PV designation, PV000
to PV255. The Present Values for channels 0 to 16 are maintained in the Stop state. It is also
retentivethe value is maintained through loss of power.

Internal/External Address Designation

The memory address designation types are R, L, M, K, F, W, SV, PV, SR, and TC.

Types F and TC can only be used to designate bits.

Types W, SV, PV, and SR can only be used to designate words.

34

D50 PLC User's Manual

Types R, L, M, and K can be used for either bits or words.

A bit address is composed of a character (R, L, M, K, F), a three digit word address (000 to
127), a decimal point, and a bit address (0 to 15). The timer/counter contact is represented by
the TC label followed by three digits. The three digits indicate the channel number of the
timer/counter (TC000 to TC255).

A word address is composed of a character (R, L, M, K, W) and a four digit number (i.e.
W0000 to W0255). Special areas of word memory have alternate designations. For example,
words W2560 to W2815 are also referred to as the System Registers, and can be represented
as SR0000 to SR0511.

The bit address indicates an On (1) or Off (0) state. The byte address is composed of 8 bits
that holds data values of 0 to 255. The word address is composed of 16 bits that holds data
values of 0 to 65,535.

D50 Memory Addresses


Type

Scope

Features

External I/O Area

R000.0 to R003.7

Local I/O memory area.

R015.0 to R018.5

56 points, 8 words

Special I/O Area


Internal Contact

R004 to R014

Configuration register for High-speec counters,

R019 to R029

Pulse Output, Input delay, and Pulse catch.

M000.0 to M031.15

Internal auxiliary contact memory area.


512 points, 32 words

Retentive Contact K000.0 to K015.15

Retentive internal auxiliary contact memory area.


256 points, 16 words

System Flag

F000.0 to F001.15

Special internal contact memory area.


32 points, 2 words

Timer/Counter

TC000 to TC255

256 channel common use.

Set Value: W2048 (SV000) to


W2303 (SV255)

TC is contact signal or Done bit.

W0000 to W0255

Word value memory area.

SV is Set Value, PV is Present Value.


Present Value: W2304 (PV000) to SV can hold values from 0 to 65535.
W2559 (PV255)
Data Word

Used for tables, data storage, and math operations.


Cannot be designated with a bit.
System Register

SR000 to SR255

Special internal data area for CPU status.

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

35

Expression Example
M 012 . 12
Bit number
2 digits, range is 0 to 15.
Word number
When used with bit number, 3 digits (000 to 127) are used.
When used for word number only, express in 4 digits (0000 to 3071).
Register Type
R, L, M, K, F, or W indicates address type.
The W memory contains the data area (W0000 to W0255), the timer Set Value
area (W2048 to W2303 = SV000 to SV255), the timer Present Value area (W2304
to W2559 = PV000 to PV255), and the System Register area (W2560 to W2815 =
SR000 to SR255).
Note: The basic contact and coil instructions require a bit designation and use the 3.2 bit address
format. Comparison and application instructions most often use word parameters, and are
expressed using the 4 digit word address.

36

D50 PLC User's Manual

Double Mode Address Designation

Words are composed of two bytes put together. The designation for a word is exactly the
same as the designation for the byte, consisting of a one character register type and a 4 digit
word address. Bytes hold 8 bits of data, words hold 16 bits of data.

The type of instruction used determines whether the register is processed as a single byte or a
word. For comparison instructions (>, <, ==, etc.), the programmer must be in Double
Mode to enter a word comparison (refer to program loader manual for details). For
application instructions, those instructions that start with a D in front of the related instruction
are word instructions, and process the data as 16-bit words instead of bytes.

Example 1:

Byte

Word

LET
D=W0
S=250

W0 is processed as 8 bit (1 byte) data (0 to


255).
S is processed as a value from 0 to 255.

DLET
D=W0
S=2500

Word W0 is processed as 16 bit (1 word) data


(0 to 65,535).
S can be a value from 0 to 65,535.

Example 2: Comparison Instruction

W0005
=<M0003

D W0005
=<M0003

The example shows comparison instructions being used in the single mode
of GPC. The parameters W0005 and M0003 represent only 8 bits of data.
The high 8 bits are NOT used as part of the comparison.
In this example, GPC is in double mode and comparison instructions are
used. The comparison is performed on 16 bits of data. All of word W0005
and M0003 will be compared.

37

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

Absolute Address Designation


In LDR, DLDR, STO, DSTO instructions, the absolute address is used to perform indirect memory
operations using pointers. The absolute address is also used by the D50 program loader port protocol
for reading and writing memory areas.
Register
Address

External
I/O

Internal
Contact

Internal
Keep
Contact

Absolute Address
Dec.

Hex.

R0000

0000

R0001

0001

R0002

0002

Register
Address

Data
Words

Absolute Address
Dec.

Hex.

W0000

512

0200

W0001

513

0201

W0002

514

0202

R0028

28

001C

W0254

766

02FE

R0029

29

001D

W0255

767

02FF

M0000

192

00C0

SV000

512

0200

M0001

193

00C1

SV001

2560

0A00

M0002

194

00C2

M0030

222

00DE

T/C Set
Value

T/C
Present
Value

SV255

2815

0AFF

PV000

2816

0B00

PV001

2817

0B01

M0031

223

00DF

K0000

320

0140

K0001

321

0141

PV255

3071

0BFF

K0002

322

0142

SR000

3072

0C00

K0003

323

0143

SR001

3073

0C01

K0014

334

014E

SR254

3326

0CFE

K0015

335

014F

SR255

3327

0CFF

System
Registers

When accessing a bit absolute address using the program loader port communications protocol, the bit
address (0 to 15) is kept separate from the word address (as shown below).
1 word display

15
4
Word absolute address

0
bit number

For example, the absolute bit address for K012.12 internal contact is $14CC (hex).
(word absolute address = $014C + bit number = $C = $14CC)
Refer to the appendix for a detailed explanation of the communications protocol.

38

D50 PLC User's Manual

I/O Address Designation

Example I/O Addressing Configuration


Module No.

00

01

02

03

06

07

I/O Points

14

14

4 words

14

2 words

14

Word No.

R0, R15

R1, R16

W240 W243

R2, R17

W248, W249

R3, R18

R0.0 R0.7

R1.0 R1.7

R2.0 R2.7

Bit No.

R15.0 R15.5 R16.0 R16.5

R17.0 R17.5

R3.0 R3.7
R18.0 R18.5

Digital I/O Address Designation

The CPU assigns addresses to the digital inputs in sequential order, starting at address R0.
Each module uses 8 bits of the address for the 8 inputs.

The CPU assigns addresses to the digital outputs in sequential order, starting at address R15.
Each modules uses 6 bits of the address for the 6 outputs.

A maximum of 3 digital modules, of any mix of voltage I/O type, may be added.

Analog I/O Address Designation

The first analog input module uses data words W240 to W243 for its four analog input
channels. Each word contains the 12-bit representation of the analog input signal for the
channel. The second analog input module is assigned words W244 to W247. These
assignments are independent of the position of the module in the chain, or whether an analog
output module is present.

The first analog output module uses data words W248 and W249 for its two analog output
channels. The 12-bit representation to be output as an analog signal on the channel must be
placed in these words. The second analog input module is assigned words W250 and W251.
These assignments are independent of the position of the module in the chain, or whether an
analog input module is present.

A maximum of two analog modules, input and/or output, may be added.

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

Special Internal Addresses


F0.0 to F0.15 (F0 word register) System/Diagnostic Functions
Address

Function

Details

Remarks

F0.0

System check

When power is applied, the system runs selfdiagnostics. Should any fault exist, the error lamp is
turned on. Output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.1

CPU ROM check

When power is applied, the system self-checks the


ROM. Should any faults exist, the error lamp is
turned on. Output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.2

CPU RAM check

When the power is applied, the system self-checks


the RAM. Should any faults exist, the error lamp is
turned on. Output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.3

User program memory


error

If the user program memory is damaged or the


program is faulty, the error lamp is turned on.
Output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.4

Program check

The CPU initially runs and checks the user


program's syntax. In the case of an error, the error
lamp is turned on. Output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.5

Not Used

F0.6

Module change error

On when an I/O module is removed/added/fails


while the system is running. The error lamp is
turned on, and output and operation are halted.

Normal: Off

F0.7

Module type error

On when module information that is stored in the


Normal: Off
CPU and module that is installed are different types.
The error lamp is turned on and operation stops.

F0.8

Input data control

Off when the running CPU input module's data is


not updated. (Input update is turned Off.)

F0.9

Output data control

Off to suspend updating of the output modules while Normal: On


the CPU is in the run state. (Output update is turned
Off.) The outputs are maintained in their last valid
state prior to update being disabled.

F0.10

All outputs OFF

Turns all outputs off while CPU is in the run state.


(Outputs are disabled.)

Normal: On

F0.11

Not Used

F0.12

Not Used

F0.13

Not Used

F0.14

Program changes during


run

On when error-checking the program while in run


mode. If there are syntax errors, the CPU is
stopped.

Normal: Off

F0.15

Run state control

On when the CPU is in the run state. Off when


stopped or paused.

Normal: On

Normal: On

39

40

D50 PLC User's Manual

F1.0 to F1.15 (F1 word register) Special Application Functions


Address

Function

Details

F1.0

First single scan

Maintain On state for first single-scan period, when


the CPU changes its status from Stop to Run.

F1.1

Scan clock

Cycle On/Off state for each scan during the


program. (1Scan On, 1Scan Off)

F1.2

0.02 sec. Clock

10 ms: On, 10 ms: Off


10ms

F1.3

0.1 sec. Clock

1 sec. Clock

10ms

50 ms: On, 50 ms: Off


50ms

F1.4

10ms

Note

50ms 50ms

500 ms: On, 500 ms: Off


500ms 500ms 500ms

F1.5

Instantaneous interrupt

On when power is off for over 20 ms.

Maintained

F1.6

Execute status

On when the CPU is in the run state.

F1.7

Keep error display

On when the K retentive data is destroyed and/or


changed on power loss.

F1.8

Carry Flag

On in the event of carry when performing math


instructions (ADD, SUB, etc.)

F1.9

Division by zero error

On when the denominator of division commands is


zero.

F1.10

Range designation error

On when the absolute address used in LDR and


STO instructions exceeds the specified range.

F1.11

Reserved

System use.

Do not use.

F1.12

Reserved

System use.

Do not use.

F1.13

Reserved

System use.

Do not use.

F1.14

Reserved

System use.

Do not use.

F1.15

Reserved

System use.

Do not use.

Note: The 16 bits in the F1 address provide the CPU's special function and self diagnosis result. They
are used for status contacts only, and are not used to modify or control the PLC. Only the F1.5
instantaneous interrupt display contact should be used as an output contact by the user, to be
turned off after power loss indication.

41

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

System Registers SR0 to SR255


Address

Function

Detail

SR000

CPU address

Indicates the CPU ID number in the lower 8 bits. 0 to 223 are the
valid user-defined values, 255 is the default value.

SR001

CPU status

Indicates current CPU information state. (stop/remote control


mode/run mode/error)
MSB

03

02

01

00

Error = 1
Run control (same as F15)
CPU switch RUN, Remote Stop = 1
CPU switch RUN = 1
CPU switch STOP = 0
SR002

User watchdog

Indicates the user program watchdog time. (unit: msec)

SR003

Scan time

Indicates the scan time when executing a program. (unit: msec)

SR004

Max. scan time

Indicates maximum value of scan time when executing a program.


Initialized as zero when the program mode changes from the stop
state to the run state.

SR005 to
SR0016

Reserved

System Use Do not use.

SR017

System error information

Gives result of self-check by CPU. Indicates error content when


F0.0 turns On.
MSB

Watchdog time error


Undefined instruction
during run state
Peripheral device fault
Misc. faults
Logic circuit fault
Microcomputer fault
SR018

Location of undefined
instruction

Indicates the location of the instruction (the step number) that


caused an undefined instruction error during program execution.

SR019

Reserved

System use.

SR020

Multiplication

Stores high order 8 bit values upon executing 16 bit multiplication


instructions.

SR021

Remainder Low

Stores the remainder after a division instruction has been


executed (low order 16 bits).

SR022

Remainder High

Stores the remainder after a division instruction has been


executed (high order 16 bits).

SR023 to
SR0029

Reserved

System use.

42

Address

D50 PLC User's Manual

Function

Detail

Syntax Error information

Stores syntax error information when the user program fails the
system diagnostic check. Each bit in the word indicates a different
error condition. See table below.

SR031

Reserved

System Use.

SR032

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 0 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR033

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 1 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR034

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 2 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR036

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 4 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR037

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 5 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR038

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 6 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR039

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 7 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR040

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 8 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR041

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 9 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR042

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 10 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR043

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 11 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR044

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 12 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR045

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 13 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR047

Error Step #

Contains step number where error occurred when bit 15 of word


SR030 is turned On.

SR030

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

43

Syntax Check Data (16 bits of SR30)

Indicates the result of the automatic check on user program syntax when the programmer or GPC
executes a syntax check, and when operation mode is switched from the Stop state to the Run state. If
the value of SR30 is not zero, F0.4 turns On. The error lamp also turns On.
There are two error correction methods:
Method 1: Find the error in the CPU online mode, then correct the program.
Method 2: Use the syntax checking function, then correct the program.

Word

SR30

Bit

Detail

On if the I/O number range of bit process instruction is beyond the specified range or
designates an external contact/output module which is not installed.

On if the channel number of the timer or the counter exceeds 255 or is duplicated.

On if the bit or word number in the application program is beyond the specified range or if it
designates a module which is not installed.

Not used.

On if an undefined instruction exists.

On in the event of a user program memory error.

On in the event of miscellaneous errors.

On if the user program memory is destroyed.

On if an external I/O register address is improperly used within the program.


For example, OUT R0.1 is used in the program, and R0.1 is an input.

On if the label numbers of the JMP or CALL instructions exceed 63, the corresponding
instruction (LBL, SBR) does not exist, and/or the corresponding LBL/SBR instructions exist
prior to JMP/CALL instructions.

10

On if the label number of the LBL instruction exceeds 63 and/or is duplicated.

11

On if the JMPS/JMP instructions are mistakenly combined and/or used.

12

On if the FOR/NEXT instructions are mistakenly combined and/or used more than five
times. (Loop)

13

On if SBR/RET instructions are not combined and/or used and/or the SBR instructions
overlap or exceed 63.

14

Not used.

15

On if no END instruction exists.

44

D50 PLC User's Manual

Timer/Counter (TC0-255)
The table below gives the alternate Word address for the timer/counter Set Value and Present Value
Ch

SV

PV

Ch

SV

PV

Ch

SV

PV

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

W2048
W2049
W2050
W2051
W2052
W2053
W2054
W2055
W2056
W2057
W2058
W2059
W2060
W2061
W2062
W2063
W2064
W2065
W2066
W2067
W2068
W2069
W2070
W2071
W2072
W2073
W2074
W2075
W2076
W2077
W2078
W2079
W2080
W2081
W2082
W2083
W2084
W2085
W2086
W2087

W2304
W2305
W2306
W2307
W2308
W2309
W2310
W2311
W2312
W2313
W2314
W2315
W2316
W2317
W2318
W2319
W2320
W2321
W2322
W2323
W2324
W2325
W2326
W2327
W2328
W2329
W2330
W2331
W2332
W2333
W2334
W2335
W2336
W2337
W2338
W2339
W2340
W2341
W2342
W2343

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79

W2088
W2089
W2090
W2091
W2092
W2093
W2094
W2095
W2096
W2097
W2098
W2099
W2100
W2101
W2102
W2103
W2104
W2105
W2106
W2107
W2108
W2109
W2110
W2111
W2112
W2113
W2114
W2115
W2116
W2117
W2118
W2119
W2120
W2121
W2122
W2123
W2124
W2125
W2126
W2127

W2344
W2345
W2346
W2347
W2348
W2349
W2350
W2351
W2352
W2353
W2354
W2355
W2356
W2357
W2358
W2359
W2360
W2361
W2362
W2363
W2364
W2365
W2366
W2367
W2368
W2369
W2370
W2371
W2372
W2373
W2374
W2375
W2376
W2377
W2378
W2379
W2380
W2381
W2382
W2383

80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

W2128
W2129
W2130
W2131
W2132
W2133
W2134
W2135
W2136
W2137
W2138
W2139
W2140
W2141
W2142
W2143
W2144
W2145
W2146
W2147
W2148
W2149
W2150
W2151
W2152
W2153
W2154
W2155
W2156
W2157
W2158
W2159
W2160
W2161
W2162
W2163
W2164
W2165
W2166
W2167

W2384
W2385
W2386
W2387
W2388
W2389
W2390
W2391
W2392
W2393
W2394
W2395
W2396
W2397
W2398
W2399
W2400
W2401
W2402
W2403
W2404
W2405
W2406
W2407
W2408
W2409
W2410
W2411
W2412
W2413
W2414
W2415
W2416
W2417
W2418
W2419
W2420
W2421
W2422
W2423

45

Chapter 5: CPU Operation and Memory

Timer/Counter Word addressing


Ch

SV

PV

Ch

SV

PV

Ch

SV

PV

120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165

W2168
W2169
W2170
W2171
W2172
W2173
W2174
W2175
W2176
W2177
W2178
W2179
W2180
W2181
W2182
W2183
W2184
W2185
W2186
W2187
W2188
W2189
W2190
W2191
W2192
W2193
W2194
W2195
W2196
W2197
W2198
W2199
W2200
W2201
W2202
W2203
W2204
W2205
W2206
W2207
W2208
W2209
W2210
W2211
W2212
W2213

W2424
W2425
W2426
W2427
W2428
W2429
W2430
W2431
W2432
W2433
W2434
W2435
W2436
W2437
W2438
W2439
W2440
W2441
W2442
W2443
W2444
W2445
W2446
W2447
W2448
W2449
W2450
W2451
W2452
W2453
W2454
W2455
W2456
W2457
W2458
W2459
W2460
W2461
W2462
W2463
W2464
W2465
W2466
W2467
W2468
W2469

166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211

W2214
W2215
W2216
W2217
W2218
W2219
W2220
W2221
W2222
W2223
W2224
W2225
W2226
W2227
W2228
W2229
W2230
W2231
W2232
W2233
W2234
W2235
W2236
W2237
W2238
W2239
W2240
W2241
W2242
W2243
W2244
W2245
W2246
W2247
W2248
W2249
W2250
W2251
W2252
W2253
W2254
W2255
W2256
W2257
W2258
W2259

W2470
W2471
W2472
W2473
W2474
W2475
W2476
W2477
W2478
W2479
W2480
W2481
W2482
W2483
W2484
W2485
W2486
W2487
W2488
W2489
W2490
W2491
W2492
W2493
W2494
W2495
W2496
W2497
W2498
W2499
W2500
W2501
W2502
W2503
W2504
W2505
W2506
W2507
W2508
W2509
W2510
W2511
W2512
W2513
W2514
W2515

212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255

W2260
W2261
W2262
W2263
W2264
W2265
W2266
W2267
W2268
W2269
W2270
W2271
W2272
W2273
W2274
W2275
W2276
W2277
W2278
W2279
W2280
W2281
W2282
W2283
W2284
W2285
W2286
W2287
W2288
W2289
W2290
W2291
W2292
W2293
W2294
W2295
W2296
W2297
W2298
W2299
W2300
W2301
W2302
W2303

W2516
W2517
W2518
W2519
W2520
W2521
W2522
W2523
W2524
W2525
W2526
W2527
W2528
W2529
W2530
W2531
W2532
W2533
W2534
W2535
W2536
W2537
W2538
W2539
W2540
W2541
W2542
W2543
W2544
W2545
W2546
W2547
W2548
W2549
W2550
W2551
W2552
W2553
W2554
W2555
W2556
W2557
W2558
W2559

46

D50 PLC User's Manual

Note: Channel: The inherent number of the timer and the counter.
Set Value (SV): The designated value for the timer (to turn On) and the counter (number of
times On) to start operation.
Present Value (PV): Current processing value of the timer (elapsed time) and the counter
(number of counts).
Note: When using GPC software, the above W registers can be represented as follows.
Ch
0
1
:
255

Set Value (SV)


W2048 = SV0
W2049 = SV1
:
W2303 = SV255

Present Value (PV)


W2304 = PV0
W2305 = PV1
:
W2559 = PV255

Where SV is Set Value and PV is Present Value.

CAUTION: Be sure you understand the programming of the timer/counter thoroughly. If you
change the above registers while the program is running or program them
incorrectly, errors or damage may occur.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instructions

This chapter contains all of the instructions that are used with the D50 PLC. The instructions are
grouped by function, and then explained in detail.
This chapter discusses:

The instructions that are used with the D50 PLC

How to read the descriptions of the instructions

Detailed information concerning the usage of the instructions

47

48

D50 PLC User's Manual

Basic Instructions
Mnemonic

Command

Ladder Symbol

Description

STR

Start

Start NO contact.

STN

Start Not

Start NC contact.

AND

And

NO contact series circuit.

ANN (ADN)

And Not

NC contact series circuit.

OR

Or

NO contact parallel circuit.

ORN

Or Not

OUT

Out

(OUT)

Relay output.

SET

Set

(SET)

Turn On output.

RST

Reset

(RST)

Turn Off output.

NOT

Not

STR DIF

Start Differential

Start rising edge contact (

).

STR DFN

Start Dif. Not

Start falling edge contact (

).

AND DIF

And Dif.

Rising edge series connection (

).

AND DFN

And Dif. Not

Falling edge series connection (

).

OR DIF

Or Dif

Rising edge parallel connection (

).

OR DFN

Or Dif. Not

Falling edge parallel connection (

).

ANB

And Block

Circuit block series connection.

ORB

Or Block

Circuit block parallel connection.

MCS

Master Control Set

(MCS)

Start batch processing block.

MCR

Master Control Reset

(MCR)

End batch processing block.

Note: NO = Normally Open


NC = Normally Closed

NC contact parallel circuit.

Invert logic result.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Timer/Counter Instructions
Mnemonic
TIM

Command
On Delay Timer

Ladder
Symbol
TIM
T CH = 10
SV = 500

Description

Remarks

Turn on after set


delay time from
input on.

Time Base: Ch 0-15:


0.01s
Ch 16-255: 0.1s

input

Done Contact: TC + channel no.

Setting range: SV = 0-65535

output

SST

Single Shot Timer

SST
T CH = 12
SV = 500

Turn off after set


delay time from
input on.

Time Base: Ch 0-15:


0.01s
Ch 16-255: 0.1s
Setting range: SV = 0-65535
Done Contact: TC + channel no.

input
output

UC

Up Counter

UC
U CH = 13
SV = 5
R

Up counter
input
present
value
output

set
value

DC

Down Counter

Down counter
input
present
value
output

Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255


(Shared with timer)
set
value

Up-Down Counter

UDC
U CH = 16
SV = 3
D
R

Up/down counter
input U
input D
present
value
output
reset

Setting range: SV = 0-65535


Done Contact: TC + channel no.

reset

UDC

Setting range: SV = 0-65535


Done Contact: TC + channel no.

reset
DC
U CH = 14
SV = 5

Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255


(Shared with timer)

set value

Range of channel: Ch 0 to 255


(Shared with timer)
Setting range: SV = 0-65535
Done Contact: TC + channel no.

49

50

D50 PLC User's Manual

Comparison Instructions
Mnemonic

Command

Byte

Word

Description

STR =
AND =
OR =

START =
AND =
OR =

A
= B

D C
= D

On if A(C) value and B(D) value are


the same.

STR <>
AND <>
OR <>

START <>
AND <>
OR <>

A
<> B

D C
<> D

On if A(C) value and B(D) value are


different. <> means the same as .

STR >
AND >
OR >

START >
AND >
OR >

A
> B

D C
> D

On if A(C) value is greater than B(D)


value.

STR >=
AND >=
OR >=

START >=
AND >=
OR >=

A
>= B

D C
>= D

On if A(C) value is greater than or


equal to B(D) value.

STR <=
AND <=
OR <=

START <=
AND <=
OR <=

A
<= B

D C
<= D

On if A(C) value is less than or equal


to B(D) value.

STR <
AND <
OR <

START <
AND <
OR <

A
< B

D C
< D

On if A(C) value is less than B(D)


value.

Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instructions


Note: Application instructions that operate in double mode on whole words (16-bit) are designated
with a D in front of the single mode instruction. For example, DINC refers to double mode
word decimal increment, DDEC refers to double mode word decimal decrement, etc.
Mnemonic

Command

Byte

Word

Description

LET
(DLET)

Let (Substitution)

LET
D=
S=

INC
(DINC)

Decimal increment

INC
D=

DINC
D=

D value increased by 1 whenever


input is On.

DEC
(DDEC)

Decimal decrement

DEC
D=

DDEC
D=

D value decreased by 1 whenever


input is On.

INCB
(DINCB)

BCD increment

INCB
D=

DINCB
D=

D value increased by 1 (BCD)


whenever input is On.

DECB
(DDECB)

BCD decrement

DECB
D=

DDECB
D=

D value decreased by 1 (BCD)


whenever input is On.

DLET
D=
S=

Store value of designated register S


into D.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Arithmetic Instructions
Mnemonic

Command

Byte

Word

Description

ADD
(DADD)

Decimal addition

ADD
D =
S1 =
S2 =

SUB
(DSUB)

Decimal subtraction

SUB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DSUB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2
(Decimal operation)

MUL
(DMUL)

Decimal
multiplication

MUL
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DMUL
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 S2
(Decimal operation)

DIV
(DDIV)

Decimal division

DIV
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DDIV
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1/S2
(Decimal operation)

ADDB
(DADDB)

BCD addition

ADDB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DADDB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2
(BCD operation)

SUBB
(DSUBB)

BCD subtraction

SUBB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DSUBB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2
(BCD operation)

MULB
(DMULB)

BCD multiplication

MULB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DMULB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 S2
(BCD operation)

DIVB
(DDIVB)

BCD division

DIVB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DDIVB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1/S2
(BCD operation)

ADC
(DADC)

Decimal addition
w/carry

ADC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DADC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2 + CY
(Decimal operation, include carry)

SBC
(DSBC)

Decimal subtraction
w/carry

SBC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DSBC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2 - CY
(Decimal operation, include carry)

ADCB
(DADCB)

BCD addition
w/carry

ADCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DADCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2 + CY
(BCD operation, include carry)

SBCB
(DSBCB)

BCD subtraction
w/carry

SBCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DSBCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2 - CY
(BCD operation, include carry)

ABS
(DABS)

Absolute value

ABS
D =

DABS
D =

D = |D|
(Absolute value operation)

NEG
(DNEG)

Negative
(2s complement)

NEG
D =

DNEG
D =

Store the 2s complement of D in D


(1s complement + 1).

NOT
(DNOT)

NOT
(1s complement)

NOT
D =

DNOT
D =

Store the 1s complement of D in D.

DADD
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2
(Decimal operation)

51

52

D50 PLC User's Manual

Logic Instructions
Mnemonic
WAND
(DAND)

WOR
(DOR)

XOR
(DXOR)

XNR
(DXNR)

Command
Bitwise AND (logic
multiply)

Bitwise OR (logic
sum)

Exclusive OR

Exclusive OR NOT
(equal circuit)

Byte
AND
D =
S1 =
S2 =

OR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

XOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

XNR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

Word
DAND
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DXOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DXNR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

Description
Store AND of S1 and S2 in D.
S1 0

S2 0

D 0

Store OR of S1 and S2 in D.
S1 0

S2 0

D 0

Store exclusive OR of S1 and S2 in


D.
S1 0

S2 0

D 0

Store exclusive OR NOT of S1 and


S2 in D.
S1 0

S2 0

D 1

Rotation Instructions
Mnemonic
RLC
(DRLC)

Command
Rotate left without
carry

Byte
RLC
D =
N =

Word
DRLC
D =
N =

Description
Rotate contents of designated
register D to the left N times.
(lowerhigher)
F1.8

RRC
(DRRC)

Rotate right without


carry

RRC
D =
N =

DRRC
D =
N =

15 ...D... 0

Rotate contents of designated


register D to the right N times.
(higherlower)
15 ...D... 0

ROL
(DROL)

Rotate left

ROL
D =
N =

DROL
D =
N =

F1.8

Rotate (shift) to the left N times.


(lowerhigher)
(Input F1.8 value for low bit)
15 ...D... 0

ROR
(DROR)

Rotate right

ROR
D =
N =

DROR
D =
N =

F1.8

Rotate (shift) to the right N times.


(higherlower)
(Input F1.8 value for high bit)
15 ...D... 0

SHL
(DSHL)

Shift left

SHL
D =
N =

DSHL
D =
N =

Shift value of designated register D to


the left N times. (Input 0 for low bit)
F1.8

SHR
(DSHR)

Shift right

SHR
D =
N =

DSHR
D =
N =

F1.8

15 ...D...

Shift value of designated register D to


the right N times. (Input 0 for high bit)
0

15 ...D... 0

F1.8

Chapter 6: Instructions

53

Word Conversion Instructions


Mnemonic
BCD
(DBCD)

Command
Binary Coded
Decimal

Byte
BCD
D =
S =

Word
DBCD
D =
S =

Description
Convert binary number of S to BCD
and store in D.
S ...... 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 =63
D ...... 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 =$63

BIN
(DBIN)

Binary

BIN
D =
S =

DBIN
D =
S =

Convert BCD of S to binary number


and store in D.
S ...... 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 =$39
D ...... 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 =39

XCHG
(DXCHG)

SEG

Exchange

Segment

XCHG
D1 =
D2 =

SEG
D =
S =

DXCHG
D1 =
D2 =

Exchange D1 and D2.


D1 .. 0 1 0 1

D1 .. 0 0 1 1

D2 .. 0 0 1 1

D2 .. 0 1 0 1

Convert the low-order 4 bit value of S


to 7-segment display pattern and
store in D.
=5
S ... 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
D ... 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
g f e d c b a

ENCO

Encode

ENCO
D =
S =

b
c

Store the location of the highest set


bit in S in D.
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
S 0..0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
invar

D iable

DECO

Decode

DECO
D =
S =

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

6+1=7

Convert the low-order 4 bit value of S


s
to a power of 2 (2 ) and store in D.
S .....

x x x x 0 1 0 1 =5

D 0..0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

DIS

Dissemble

DIS
D =
Nd =
Sr =

Separate Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits


each, and store in the low 4 bits of
words starting at D. (N = 0-3)
Sr $ 7 4 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Nd+1
Nd=3

UNI

Unify

UNI
D =
Sr =
Nd =

D
D+1
D+2
D+3

$0000
$0000
$0000
$0000

0
1
0
0

1
1
1
1

0
1
0
1

1
0
0 4
1 7

Combine the low 4 bits of Nd+1


words starting at Sr, and store in D.
(Nd = 0-3)
Nd+1
Nd=3

Sr
S+1
S+2
S+3

$
$
$
$

0
1
1
0

1
1
0
1

0
1
1
0

$ 4 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

1
1
0
0

54

D50 PLC User's Manual

Bit Conversion Instructions


Mnemonic
BSET

Command
Bit Set

Byte
BSET
D =
N =

Word

Description
Set Nth bit of D to 1.
D

......

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

N=5

BRST

Bit Reset

BRST
D =
N =

Reset Nth bit of D to 0.


D

......

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
N=3

BNOT

Bit Not

BNOT
D =
N =

Reverse state of Nth bit of D.


D

......

......

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
N=4

BTST

Bit Test

BTST
D =
N =

0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0

Set carry bit F1.8 to the state of the


Nth bit of D.
D

......

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
N=6

SUM

SC

Sum

Set Carry

SUM
D =
S =

SC

Store the number of bits in S that are


1 in D.
S

$00

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 4 ON(=1)s

0..0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 D=4

Set carry bit (F1.8) to 1.


1

RC

Reset Carry

RC

F1.8

Reset carry bit (F1.8) to 0.


0

CC

Complement Carry

CC

F1.8

F1.8

Reverse carry bit (F1.8).


F1.8

F1.8

Chapter 6: Instructions

55

Transfer Instructions
Mnemonic
LDR
(DLDR)

Command
Load D(Sr)

Byte
LDR
D =
Sr =

Word
DLDR
D =
Sr =

Description
Store value at absolute address Sr in
D.
Register
Value

Absolute
Address

Sr =

D=

STO
(DSTO)

Store (D)Sr

STO
Sr =
D=

DSTO
Sr =
D=

Store Sr in register at absolute


address D.
Absolute
Address

Sr =

MOV
D =
Sr =
Ns =

Data
Value
X

D=

Move

Y
Y

Register
Value

MOV

Data
Value

Copy Ns words from Sr to D.


Sr

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Sr+1
Sr+2

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D+1
D+2

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Ns=3

FMOV

Fill Move

FMOV
D =
Ns =
V =

Repeatedly copy the value V, Ns


times to words starting at D.
V value

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D+1

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D+2
D+3

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Ns=4

BMOV

Bit Move

BMOV
Db =
Sb =
Ns =

Move Ns bits from bit address Sb to


bit address Db.
Sb ......

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

If Ns=4
Db ......

BFMV

Bit Fill Move

BFMV
Db =
Ns =
V =

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

Repeatedly copy the bit value V, N


times to bit address Db. (V = 0,1) (Ns
= 0, 1,, 15).
V=1
Db ......

Ns=5
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

56

D50 PLC User's Manual

Block Processing Instructions


Mnemonic

Command

FOR
(DFOR)

For Loop

NEXT

Next

JMP

Jump

LBL

Label

Byte
FOR
D =

NEXT

JMP
L =

LBL
L =

Word
DFOR
D =

Description
Begin execution of instructions
between FOR and corresponding
NEXT. Repeat execution D times.
Decrease D of FOR instruction by 1.
If not zero, repeat from FOR
Instruction.
Jump to LBL instruction L.
(L = 0 to 63)
Position jumped to by JMP
instruction.
(L = 0 to 63)

JMPS

Jump Start

JMPS

Jump to JMPE instruction.

JMPE

Jump End

JMPE

Position jumped to by JMPS


instruction.

CALL

Call Subroutine

SBR

Subroutine Start

CALL
Sb =

SBR
Sb =

Call subroutine Sb.


(Sb = 0 to 31)
Start subroutine.
(Sb = 0 to 31)

RET

Subroutine Return

RET

End subroutine. Returns execution to


instruction after CALL.

WAT

Watchdog Timer

WAT

Clear watchdog elapsed value.

END

END

END

End program. This instruction is


automatically added by GPC.

Chapter 6: Instructions

57

How to Read the Description of Instructions


Each instruction is explained in three parts: the instruction itself, its ladder diagram, and a description.
This section explains how to read the instructions.

Sample Instruction
Mnemonic

Substitution Formula
(Assignment expression)

Range

LET

Direct substitution of number


(direct output of number)

 Bit

DLET

Byte
Word

Explanation of Codes
 = unavailable option
= available option
$xx indicates a hexadecimal number.

Explanation of Table

MnemonicA byte (single mode) instruction, D designates word (double mode) instruction.

Assignment expressionDescription of the instruction.

RangeSize of data that can be used by this instruction.

Sample Ladder
R

LET
D=
S=

D: Destination
S: Source
Example: S = M0, and M0 is 123
D = R17, and R17 is 45
Before execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 45
After execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 123

Explanation of Ladder
The ladder diagram shows the structure of the instruction as it is displayed. Additional text typically
gives an example and explains the processing structure.

58

D50 PLC User's Manual

Sample Description
Range: LET: 0 to 255
DLET: 0 to 65,535
1.
2.
3.
4.

Either a register (R, M, K, L, or W) address or a constant number can be assigned for S.


When S is a register address, copy the data of the register to D.
When S is a constant number, copy the value to D.
This operation occurs on every scan for which the input condition to the instruction is true.

Explanation of Description
The description provides details of the instruction.

Sample Example
Program Expression
R000.2

LET
D = M0000
S = 123
LET
D = M001
S = 100

R000.3
R

Time Chart
R000.2
R000.3
M0000
M0001
R0017

0000
0000
0000

0123
0100
0000

0123
0100
0123

LET
D = R017
S = M0000

Explanation of Example
The example shows an application of an instruction as programmed in GPC. The time chart
demonstrates how the instruction operates with respect to time and the changing input conditions for
the example. The results of the operation may also be shown as part of the example.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Basic Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Start of the Circuit

Range

STR

Start rung with NO contact

Bit

STN

Start rung with NC contact

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
A

Used for the start of a circuit.


STR: Start NO (normally open) contact
STN: Start NC (normally closed) contact (STR NOT)
A: Circuit started with NO contactSTR

( )

( )

B: Circuit started with NC contactSTN

Description
1.
2.
3.
4.

Every rung in the ladder program begins with either a STR or STN.
Every rung will contain one or more contacts.
Every rung will end in one or more output coils or application instructions.
When programming a ladder with NO and NC contacts, GPC will automatically use the
proper contact instruction (STR, STN, AND, ANN, OR, ORN).
R000.2

R015.2
(OUT)

R000.3

R015.3
(OUT)

Start of circuit: R000.2, R000.3


End of circuit: R015.2, R015.3

Example
Program Expression
R000.0

M000.0
(OUT)

R000.1

M000.1
(OUT)
M000.2
(OUT)

Time Chart
R000.1
M000.1
R000.1
M000.1
M000.2

M000.0 has the same logic as R000.0


M000.1, M000.2 have the opposite logic as R000.1

59

60

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic
AND

Series Connection

Range
Bit

Series connection

ANN

 Byte

(ADN)

 Word

Ladder
AND: NO (normally open) contact series connection.
ANN: NC (normally closed) contact series connection.

Description
1.
2.

AND and ADN (AND NOT) indicate a series connection of each contact.
The number of ANDs and ADNs used within one branch (rung) is unlimited.
R000.3

3.

R000.4

M010.15
(OUT)

M010.15 is On only when contact R000.3 is On and contact R000.4 is Off. M010.15 is Off
for all other cases.

Example
Program Expression
R000.1
M000.0

R000.2

M000.0
(OUT)
M000.1
(OUT)

Time Chart
R000.1
R000.2
M000.0
M000.1

Contact M000.0 is On only when R000.1 is On and R000.2 is Off. M000.0 is Off for all other cases.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instruction
Mnemonic
OR

Parallel Circuit

Range
Bit

Parallel connection

ORN

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
OR: NO (normally open) contact parallel connection.
ORN: NC (normally closed) contact parallel connection.

Description
1.
2.

OR and ORN (OR NOT) indicate parallel connection of each contact.


The number of ORs and ORNs used within a branch is unlimited.
(OUT)

Example
Program Expression
R000.1
R000.2

M000.1
(OUT)

Time Chart
R000.1
R000.2
R000.0

Contact M000.1 is On if contact R000.1 is On or contact R000.2 is Off.

61

62

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Output

Range

OUT

Relay output

Bit

SET

On output

 Byte

RST

Off output

 Word

Ladder
OUT: Relay coil turns On or Off based on the state of the input conditions.
SET: Relay coil turns On when the input conditions are true.
RST: Relay coil turns Off when the input conditions are true.

(OUT)
(SET)
(RST)

Description
For an OUT instruction, you cannot use the same address twice.
OUT, SET, and RST instructions must be connected to the right bus and not in the middle of the
circuit.
1.
2.

3.

4.

OUTUse for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. On or Off according
to status of the input condition.
SETUse for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. The same address
can be used more than once. When the input conditions are true, the coil is turned On and
stays on unless turned off by a RST. The output is turned Off in the Stop mode.
RSTUse for external I/O (R), internal (M), and retentive (K) contacts. The same address
can be used more than once. When the input conditions are true, the coil is turned Off and
stays off unless turned on by a SET. The output is Off in the Stop mode.
When using retentive coils (K) in OUT, SET, or RST, the state is maintained. It will remain
On or Off even after placed in the Stop mode and power is turned off.

Example
Program Expression
R001.1

M000.4
(OUT)

R002.2

M000.5
(SET)

R002.3

M000.5
(RST)

Time Chart
R001.1

R002.2

M000.4

M000.5

R002.2

M000.4 follows contact logic for R001.1 input.


When R002.2 contact is On, M000.5 output is On.
When R002.3 contact is On, M000.5 output is Off.

Chapter 6: Instructions

63

Instruction
Mnemonic

Reverse

Range

Reverse the previous status of the Bit


logic.
 Byte

NOT

 Word

Ladder
A

Reverse the logic result of the input conditions before A at B.


Reverse the previous On/Off state and transfer to the next input.
The results of the NOT execution:
Before
After
A (On)
B (Off)
A (Off)
B (On)

Description
1.
2.

The instruction cannot be connected directly to the busit must come after a contact or set of
contacts.
The instruction directly inverts the result of the input conditions before it. The instruction can
be used for verification of the circuit or in the test stage.

C
(OUT)

On

On

Off

Off

On

On

On

Off

On

Off

Off

On

Example
Program Expression
R000.0 R000.1

Time Chart
R015.0
(OUT)

R000.0
R000.1
R015.0

64

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic
STR DIF

Edge Contact

Range

Contact which is On for one scan


at the up or down point of contact

STR DFN
AND DIF

Bit
 Byte
 Word

AND DFN
OR DIF
OR DFN

Ladder
DIF

DIF: On at the rising edge (

DFN

DFN: On at the falling edge (

) (OffOn) for one scan.


) (OnOff) for one scan.

Description
1.
2.

3.

4.

The DIF and DFN instructions may be used more than once in the ladder program for any of
the bit addresses (R, L, M, K, F, and TC).
The DIF instruction is a contact which is On for the first scan after the signal has changed
from OffOn. The contact is Off for all other scans, when the signal has not changed from
Off or On.
The DFN instruction is a contact which is On for the first scan after the signal has changed
from OnOff. The contact is Off for all other scans, when the signal has not changed from
Off or On.
Both DIF and DFN can be used on the same bit address in a single scan.

Example
Program Expression
R001.4
R
R001.5
F

M002.4
(OUT)

Time Chart
R001.4
R001.5

1scan

1scan

1scan

M002.4

Contact M002.4 is On if contact R001.4 changes from OffOn or contact R001.5 changes from
OnOff.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instruction
Mnemonic

Block Circuit

ANB

Range
Bit

Connect circuit by block

ORB

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
R000.0

R000.2

R000.1

R000.3

A block

B block

R015.0
(OUT)

A block
R000.0

R000.2

R000.1

R000.3

R015.0
(OUT)

B block

ANB: block in series

ORB: block in parallel

Description
1.

2.

3.

Block in series:





Series connection of more than two contacts.





Parallel connection of more than two contacts.

Starts with STR or STN.

Ends with ANB.


Block in parallel:
Starts with STR or STN.

Ends with ORB.


When programming in ladder, GPC will automatically add the proper ANB and ORB
instructions as required by the contact connections.

Example
Program Expression (ANB)
R000.0

R000.2

R000.1

R000.3

A block

B block

R015.0
(OUT)

Program Expression (ORB)


R0.0

R0.2

R0.1

R0.3

R15.0
(OUT)

65

66

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic
MCS

Master Control Set (Reset)


Execute block circuit using the
specified conditions.

MCR

Range
 Bit
 Byte
 Word

Ladder
(MCS)

condition
circuit block

MCS: Enable processing of the following block of instructions.


MCR: End block of instructions enabled by MCS.

(MCR)

Description
1.

2.
3.

MCS (Master Control Set)Marks the start of a conditional block of instructions. When the
input conditions to the MCS are false, the block of instructions that follow are executed as
false. Must be used with MCR.
MCR (Master Control Reset)Marks the end of a conditional block of instructions. Must be
used with MCS.
Up to seven MCS/MCR blocks can be nested.
MCS..
MCS..

Loop 1
Loop 2

MCS.. Loop 3
MCR
MCR
MCR

4.

If you use eight or more MCS/MCR nested blocks, a syntax error will occur.

Example
Program Expression
F0.15

Time Chart
R15.0
(SET)

R000.0
(MCS)

R00.0
R15.0

R15.0
(RST)
(MCR)

The circuit block R15.0 bit is reset (0) by R000.0.

Chapter 6: Instructions

67

Timer/Counter Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Timer

Range

TIM

On delay timer

Bit

SST

Single shot timer

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
TIM
T CH =
SV =

In t seconds (t = SV time base) after the input is On, the output is On.
If the input is Off, the output is Off.
Valid channel numbers: Ch 0 through Ch 255 (256 channels)
Done contact: TC + channel number
SV set range: 0 to 65,535

SST
T CH =
SV =

For t seconds (t = SV time base) after input is On, the output is On. At
the end of t seconds, the output is Off.
If the input is Off, the output is Off.
Valid channel numbers: Ch 0 through Ch 255 (256 channels)
Done contact: TC + channel number

Description
1.

Ch 0 to Ch 15: Time base = 0.01 sec (10 msec)


Ch 16 to Ch 255: Time base = 0.1 sec (100 msec)
Input

t sec

TIM
SST

2.
3.
4.

5.

The output done contact of the timer is TC + channel number.


The channel number can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or counter
instructions (UC, DC , UDC).
To change the Set Value or Present Value of the timer while the program is running, modify
registers W2048 to W2559. In GPC, you may also reference these registers using the PV or
SV designation.
The Present Value (PV) is reset to zero when the input is Off, in Stop mode, or when power is
off.

68

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
R000.0

TIM
T CH = 12
SV = 70

R000.0
0.7 sec

R000.1

SST
T CH = 200
SV = 70

TC012

M11.5
(OUT)

TC200

M22.5
(OUT)

TC12

R000.1
7 sec
TC200

Program Expression

Time Chart

Chapter 6: Instructions

69

Instruction
Mnemonic

Timer (I)

Range

UC

Up counter

Bit

DC

Down counter

 Byte
 Word

Example of UC with SV = 3.

UC
U CH =
SV =
R

condition
1
condition
3
TC0

Whenever count input condition (U input) turns On, PV


increases by 1. When PV and SV are the same, the output
TC done contact is On. When the reset input condition (R
input) is On, the output contact is Off.

While the count input pulses On, the PV will continue to


count up to a maximum of 65,535. When the reset input is
On, the PV is reset to a value of 0.

(OUT)

Input
(condition 1)
Input
(condition 3)

3
Present
Value (PV)
Output
(TC)

2
0

Set Value
(SV)

Example of DC with SV = 3.

DC
D CH =
SV =
R

condition
2
condition
3

Input
(condition 2)
Reset
(condition 3)

Whenever count input condition (D input) turns On, PV


decreases by 1. When PV is 0, the output TC done contact
is On.

When the reset input condition (R input) is turned On, the


TC done contact is turned Off, and the PV is set to 0.

Set Value
(SV)
Present
Value (PV)
Output
(TC)

Description
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

The timer/counter channel can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or
counter instructions (TIM, SST , UDC). A maximum of 256 channels (Ch 0 to
Ch 255) can be used.
The output done contact is displayed as TC + channel no. in the counter.
The elapsed value (PV) of the counter is maintained in case of a power failure and for
retentive purposes.
When SV is 0, the output contact (TC) turns On if one pulse of input occurs.
SV can be specified from 0 to 65,535.

CAUTION: Each input condition to the counter should be on its own line of the rung. They
should not share a common contact or be connected in any way.

70

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
Program Expression
R000.0
R000.1
TC000

UC
U CH = 0
SV = 3
R
M0.0
(OUT)

Time Chart
R000.0

R000.1
counter
time value
Output TCO

0 0

Chapter 6: Instructions

71

Instruction
Mnemonic

Up/Down Counter

UDC

Range
Bit

Up/Down counter

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
UDC
U CH =
SV =
S

condition
1
condition
2
condition
3

U input
(condition 1)
D input
(condition 2)
Reset
(condition 3)
Present
Value (PV)
Output (TC)

Set Value
(SV)

Description
1.

2.

When the up count input (U input) turns On, the Present Value (PV) increases by 1. When the
down count input (D input) turns On, PV decreases by 1. When PV is greater than or equal to
the Set Value (SV) or is reduced to 0, the output done contact turns On.
In the following cases, the output done contact changes from On to Off:





3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

8.

When the reset input is turned On.


When the PV is decreased below the SV by the down count pulse input.

When the PV increases from 0 to 1 by the up count pulse input.


If the reset input (R input) is On, the output is Off. In this state, the up/down counter input
pulses are ignored and the Present Value stays reset to 0.
When the up count input pulse and the down count input pulse occur at the same time, the PV
does not change.
When the PV is 0, if the down count pulse is input, the Present Value does not change, and
the output is On. When the Present Value is 65,535, if the up-counter pulse is input, the
Present Value is reset to 0.
When the counter Set Value is 0, if the reset input is On then the output is Off. If up or down
is input while the reset input is Off, the output changes to On.
The timer/counter channel can only be used once. It cannot be reused by other timer or
counter instructions (TIM, SST, UC, DC). The number of channels available is 256 (Ch 0
through Ch 255).
The SV can be set to a maximum value of 65,535.

72

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
Program Expression
R000.0
R000.1
TC15
TC64

UDC
U CH = 64
SV = 5
S

Time Chart
U input (R0.0)

Down Input (R0.1)

R
M1.0
(OUT)

Reset Input (TC15)


Present Value (PV64)
Output (TC64)

5 4

Chapter 6: Instructions

73

Comparison Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Comparing the Value

Range
 Bit

A = B (A is equal to B)

<>

A <> B (A is not equal to B)

>

A > B (A is greater than B)

>=

A >= B (A is greater than or equal to B)

<=

A <= B (A is less than or equal to B)

<

A < B (A is less than B)

Byte
Word

Ladder
A or B: Constant value 0 to 65,535 or a word address (R, L, M, K,
W, PV, SV, SR).
D is displayed when words are input. When using GPC5 to
program, change the mode to double (Ctrl+T) and then enter the
comparison command.

A
= B
A
<= B

D X
<> Y

Description
1.
2.
3.

The comparison functions as a contact, whose On/Off state is determined by the result of the
comparison of A and B. If the comparison is true, the state is On.
Each comparison instruction can be used with the STR, AND, and OR instructions (GPC will
automatically use the correct instruction).
Double mode comparison instructions can process up to 16 bits of data (0 to 65,535).

Example
Program Expression
M0.4
(OUT)

M21
= = K12
R000.0

R001.0

M21
<= 300

Time Chart
R0.0
R1.0

M21
<= K12

M0.5
(OUT)
M0.6
(OUT)

M21

K12

100

M0.4
M0.5
M0.6

100

400

74

D50 PLC User's Manual

Substitution, Increment/Decrement Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Substitution Formula

LET

Direct substitution of number


(direct output of number)

DLET

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
LET
D=
S=

D: Destination
S: Source
Example: S = M0, and M0 is 123
D = R17, and R17 is 45
Before execution: M0 = 123, R17 = 45
After execution:
M0 = 123, R17 = 123

Description
Range: LET: 0 to 255
DLET: 0 to 65,535
1.
2.
3.
4.

Either a register (R, M, K, L, or W) address or a constant number can be assigned for S.


When S is a register address, copy the data of the register to D.
When S is a constant number, copy the value to D.
This operation occurs on every scan for which the input condition to the instruction is true.

Example
Program Expression
R000.2
R

LET
D = M0000
S = 123
LET
D = M0001
S = 100

R000.3
R

LET
D = R0003
S = M0000

Time Chart
R000.2
R000.3
M000.0
M000.1
R000.3

0000
0000
0000

0123
0100
0000

0123
0100
0123

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instruction
Mnemonic

Increment

Range

INC

Increment (INC, DINC)

 Bit

DINC

BCD increment (INCB, DINCB)

Byte

INCB

Word

DINCB

Ladder
R

INC
D=

INCB
D=

D = D + 1: Decimal number increment


D = D + 1: BCD increment

Description
1.
2.
3.
4.

INC and DINC increase D in decimal by 1 when the input is On.


INCB and DINCB increase D in BCD (Binary Coded Decimal) by 1.
INC and INCB are byte instructions for processing 8 bit data.
DINC and DINCB are word instructions for processing 16 bit data.

Example
Program Expression
R000.1
R

INC
D = M0005
INCB
D = M0008

Time Chart
Input (R0.1) M0005 (decimal)

M0008(BCD)

...... 0 0 0 0 0

.. 0 0 0 0 0

...... 0 0 0 0 1

.. 0 0 0 0 1

...... 0 0 0 1 0

.. 0 0 0 1 0

...... 0 1 0 0 1

.. 0 1 0 0 1

10

...... 0 1 0 1 0

.. 1 0 0 0 0

...... 0 1 0 1 1

.. 1 0 0 0 1

11
Max

$FFFF

$9999

75

76

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Decrement

Range

DEC

Decrement (DEC, DDEC)

 Bit

DDEC

BCD decrement (DECB, DDECB)

Byte

DECB

Word

DDECB

Ladder
R

DEC
D=

DECB
D=

D = D - 1: Decimal decrement

D = D - 1: BCD decrement

Description
1.
2.
3.

DEC and DDEC decrease D by 1 down to 0 when the input is On.


DECB and DDECB decrease D by 1 in BCD to 0 when the input is On.
Byte instructions (DEC, DECB) process 8 bit data, word instructions(DDEC, DDECB)
process 16 bit data.

Example
Program Expression
R000.1
R

R000.2
R

LET
D = M10
S = $11

Time Chart
R0.1

R0.2

M10 (decimal)

M12 (BCD)

...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

LET
D = M12
S = $11

...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

...... 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

...... 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

DEC
D = M10

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

...... 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

DECB
D = M12

Chapter 6: Instructions

77

Arithmetic Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Addition

Range

ADD

Decimal addition (ADD, DADD)

 Bit

DADD

BCD addition (ADDB, DADDB)

Byte

ADDB

Word

DADDB

Ladder
R

ADD
D =
S1 =
S2 =

ADDB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2
Decimal:
S1 = 21, and S2 = 22
Hexadecimal: S1 = $15 and S2 = $16
ADD Example:
Decimal: 21 + 22 = 43
ADDB Example:
BCD:
$15 + $16 = $31

Description
1.
2.

Add the data in the S1 and S2 addresses, then store the result in the D register.
When using ADD and ADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DADD and DADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.
5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

78

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
Program Expression
R0
R

ADD
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
DADD
D = W11
S1 = W0
S2 = W3
ADDB
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 00017 = $0011
W1 = 00001 = $0001
W2 = 00025 = $0019
W3 = 00250 = $00FA
Operation results: W10 = 00042 = $002A
W11 = 00267 = $010B
W12 = 00048 = $0030

Chapter 6: Instructions

79

Instruction
Mnemonic

Subtraction

Range

SUB

Decimal subtraction (SUB, DSUB)  Bit

DSUB

BCD subtraction (SUBB, DSUBB)

SUBB

Byte
Word

DSUBB

Ladder
R

SUB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

SUBB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2
Decimal:
S1 = 34 and S2 = 19
Hexadecimal: S1 = $22 and S2 = $13
SUB Example:
Decimal:
34 - 19 = 15
SUBB Example:
BCD:

$22 - $13 = $09

Description
1.
2.

Subtract the data in S2 from S1, then store the result in the D register.
When using SUB and SUBB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DSUB and DSUBB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.
5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0
R

SUB
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
DSUB
D = W11
S1 = W1
S2 = W3
SUBB
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 00016 = $0010
W1 = 00520 = $0208
W2 = 00007 = $0007
W3 = 00384 = $0180
Operation results: W10 = 00009 = $0009
W11 = 00136 = $0088
W12 = 00003 = $0003

80

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Multiplication

MUL

Range

Decimal multiplication (MUL,


DMUL)

DMUL

BCD multiplication (MULB,


DMULB)

MULB
DMULB

 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
R

MUL
D =
S1 =
S2 =

MULB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 S2
Decimal:
S1 = 3 and S2 = 7
Hexadecimal: S1 = $03 and S2 = $07
MUL Example:
Decimal:
3 7 = 21
MULB Example:
BCD:

$03 $07 = $21

Description
1.
2.

Multiply the data in the S1 and S2 addresses, then store the result in the D register.
When using MUL and MULB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DMUL and DMULB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.

5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On. The high word of the result that exceeds the range of D is automatically stored in
SR20.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0
R

MUL
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
DMUL
D = W11
S1 = W1
S2 = W3
MULB
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 00002 = $0002
W1 = 00030 = $001D
W2 = 00006 = $0006
W3 = 00500 = $01E4
Operation results: W10 = 00012 = $000C
W11 = 15000 = $3A98
W12 = 00018 = $0012

Chapter 6: Instructions

81

Instruction
Mnemonic

Division

Range

DIV

Decimal division (DIV, DDIV)

 Bit

DDIV

BCD division (DIVB, DDIVB)

Byte

DIVB

Word

DDIVB

Ladder
R

DIV
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DIVB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 S2
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
DIV Example:
Decimal:
DIVB Example:
BCD:

S1 = 18 and S2 = 3
S1 = $12 and S2 = $03
18 3 = 6

$12 $03 = $04

Description
1.
2.

Divide the data in S1 by S2, then store the result in the D register.
When using DIV and DIVB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DDIV and DDIVB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.
5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

The quotient is stored in the D register, and the remainder in special register SR22.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0
R

DIV
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W2
DDIV
D = W11
S1 = W1
S2 = W3
DIVB
D = W12
S1 = W0
S2 = W2

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 00024 = $0018
W1 = 01024 = $0400
W2 = 00004 = $0004
W3 = 00128 = $0080
Operation results: W10 = 00006 = $0006
W11 = 00008 = $0008
W12 = 00004 = $0004

82

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Command

Addition with Carry

ADC

Decimal addition with carry (ADC,


DADC)

DADC

BCD addition with carry (ADCB,


DADCB)

ADCB
DADCB

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
R

ADC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

ADCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 + S2 + carry
Decimal:
S1 = 21, and S2 = 22
Hexadecimal: S1 = $15 and S2 = $16
Carry Flag:
F1.8 = On
ADC Example:
Decimal:
21 + 22 + 1 = 44
ADCB Example:
BCD:
$15 + $16 + $1 = $32

Description
1.
2.

Add the data in the S1 and S2 addresses. If the carry flag F1.8 is On, add 1, otherwise add 0.
Then store the result in the D register.
When using ADC and ADCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DADD and DADDB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.
5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

83

Example
Program Expression

Initial conditions:

R0.0
R

R0.0
R

SC

ADC
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

R0.0
R

R0.0
R

Operation Results

RC

ADCB
D = W11
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

W0 = 00017 = $0011
W1 = 00025 = $0019
Operation results: W10 = 00017 + 00025 +1 = 00043
W11 = $0011 + $0019 + 0 = $0030

84

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Command

Subtraction with Carry

SBC

Decimal subtraction with carry


(SBC, DSBC)

DSBC

BCD subtraction with carry


(SBCB, DSBCB)

SBCB
DSBCB

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
R

SBC
D =
S1 =
S2 =

SBCB
D =
S1 =
S2 =

D = S1 - S2 - carry
Decimal:
Hexadecimal:
Carry Flag:
SBC Example:
Decimal:
SBCB Example:
BCD:

S1 = 34 and S2 = 19
S1 = $22 and S2 = $13
F1.8 = On
34 - 19 - 1 = 14
$22 - $13 - $01 = $08

Description
1.
2.

Subtract the data in S2 from S1. If the carry flag F1.8 is On, subtract 1. Then store the result
in the D register.
When using SBC and SBCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




3.

When using DSBC and DSBCB, the calculation ranges are as follows:




4.
5.

S1: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)


S2: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
D: 0 to 255 (0 to $FF)
S1: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
S2: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)
D: 0 to 65,535 (0 to $FFFF)

If the result exceeds the range of calculation, a carry occurs. The carry flag (F1.8) is changed
to On.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression

Initial conditions:

R0.0
R

R0.0
R

SC

SBC
D = W10
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

R0.0
R

R0.0
R

Operation Results

RC

SBCB
D = W11
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

W0 = 00016 = $0010
W1 = 00002 = $0002
Operation results: W10 = 00016 - 00002 - 1 = 00013
W11 = $0010 - $0002 - 0 = $0008

85

86

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Absolute Value, NEG and NOT

Range

ABS

ABS: Absolute value

 Bit

DABS

NEG: 2's complement

Byte

NEG

NOT: 1's complement

Word

DNEG
NOT
DNOT

Ladder
R

ABS
D=

NEG
D=

NOT
D=

ABS: Take the absolute value of D, and store it in D.


NEG: Take the 2s complement and store it in D.
NOT: Take the 1s complement and store it in D.

Description
1.

For the ABS (absolute value) instruction, if the highest bit (MSB) is 1, take the 2s
complement. If the highest bit is 0, leave it as it is.

2.

For example, the absolute value of $9A52 (=1001 1010 0101 0010) is $65AE (=0110
0101 1010 1110). The absolute value of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $7A52.
The NEG (2s complement) instruction is expressed as the 1s complement + 1.

3.

For example, DNEG of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $85AE (=1000 0101 1010
1110)
The NOT (1s complement) instruction is performed by reversing each bit.

4.

For example, DNOT of $7A52 (=0111 1010 0101 0010) is $85AD (=1000 0101 1010
1101)
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0 0
R

DABS
D = W0
DABS
D = W1
DNEG
D = W2
DNOT
D = W3

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = $9A52
W1 = $7A52
W2 = $7A52
W3 = $7A52
Operation results: W0 = $65AE
W1 = $7A52
W2 = $85AE
W3 = $85AD

Chapter 6: Instructions

87

Logic Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Bit AND Operation

WAND

Range
 Bit

Bit AND operation

DAND

Byte
Word

Ladder
Process each bit of S1 and S2 in bit AND operation and store the
result in D.

WAND
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S1
0
0
1
1

DAND
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S2
0
1
0
1

D
0
0
0
1

Description
1.

Process the values of the S1 and S2 bits (byte/word) in bit AND operation and store the result
in D.
For example: S1 = $00FF (hex)
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $0033 (hex)
S1

2.

S2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
AND
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DAND
D = W2
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $XXXX
W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $0033

88

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Bit OR Operation

WOR

Range
 Bit

Bit OR operation

DOR

Byte
Word

Ladder
Process S1 and S2 in bit OR operation and store the result in D.

WOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S1
0
0
1
1

DOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S2
0
1
0
1

D
0
1
1
1

Description
1.

Process S1 and S2 (byte/word) by bit OR operation and store the result in D.


For example: S1 = $00FF (hex)
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $33FF (hex)
S1

2.

S2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
OR
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DOR
D = W2
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $XXXX
W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $33FF

Chapter 6: Instructions

89

Instruction
Mnemonic

Bit Exclusive OR Operation

XOR

Range
 Bit

Bit exclusive OR operation

DXOR

Byte
Word

Ladder
Process S1 and S2 in bit exclusive OR operation and store the
result in D.

XOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S1
0
0
1
1

DXOR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

S2
0
1
0
1

D
0
1
1
0

Description
1.

Process S1 and S2 (byte/word) by bit exclusive OR operation and store the result
in D.
For example: S1 = $00FF (hex)
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $33CC (hex)
S1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
XOR (Exclusive OR)

2.

S2

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DXOR
D = W2
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $XXXX
W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $33CC

90

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Bit Exclusive NOR Operation

XNR

Range
 Bit

Bit exclusive OR NOT operation

DXNR

Byte
Word

Ladder
R

XNR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

DXNR
D =
S1 =
S2 =

Process S1 and S2 in bit exclusive OR NOT operation and store


the result in D.
S1
0
0
1
1

S2
0
1
0
1

D
1
0
0
1

Description
1.

2.

Process S1 and S2 (word/double word) by bit exclusive OR NOT operation and store the
result in D.
For example: S1 = $00FF (hex)
S2 = $3333 (hex)
D = $CC33 (hex)
S1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

S2

DXNR (Exclusive OR NOT)


0 01 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DXNR
D = W2
S1 = W0
S2 = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $XXXX
W0 = $00FF
W1 = $3333
W2 = $CC33

Chapter 6: Instructions

91

Rotation Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Rotate to the Left Without Carry

RLC

Rotate specified address to the


left (low to high)

DRLC

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder

MSB
carry
(F1.8)

D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

RLC
D=
N=

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

p o n m l k j

LSB

i h g f e d c b a
p

Description
1.

Order:





2.

Shift by N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit).


Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the MSB (most significant bit).
Shift the MSB to the LSB (least significant bit).
Shift the register specified as D to the left by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
higher in the register.

3.

The D register is either a byte or a word. For RLC (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DRLC (word), N =
0 to 15.

4.

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

RLC
D = M0000
N =1
DRLC
D = M0001
N =2

Operation Results
Initial condition:
Operation results:

M0000 = $0F0F
M0001 = $0F0F
M0000 = $0F1E
M0001 = $3C3C

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

92

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Rotate to the Right Without Carry

RRC

Rotate the specified address to the


right (high to low)

DRRC

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

RRC
D=
N=

MSB

LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

p o n m l k j

i h g f e d c b a

carry
(F1.8)

Description
1.

Order:





2.
3.
4.

Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit).


Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the LSB (least significant bit).
Shift the LSB to the MSB (most significant bit).
Shift the register specified as D to the right by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
lower in the register.
The D register is either a byte or a word. For RLC (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DRLC (word), N =
0 to 15.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

RRC
D = M0000
N=1
DRRC
D = M0001
N=2

Operation Results
Initial condition:
Operation results:

M0000 = $0F0F
M0001 = $0F0F
M0000 = $0F87
M0001 = $C3C3

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Chapter 6: Instructions

93

Instruction
Mnemonic

Rotate to the Left

ROL

Rotate the specified address to


the left with the carry flag

DROL

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder

carry
(F1.8)

D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

ROL
D=
N=

MSB
C

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

p o n m l k j

LSB

i h g f e d c b a
C

Description
1.

Order:





2.

3.
4.

Shift N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit) including the carry bit.
The MSB (most significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).
Input F1.8 (carry bit) in the LSB (least significant bit).
This instruction is different from the RLC instruction because it sends the MSB to the carry
bit and the carry bit moves to the LSB. The input to the LSB can be changed by setting or
clearing the carry bit.
The D register is either a byte or a word. For ROL (word), N = 0 to 7. For DROL (word), N =
0 to 15.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

94

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

R0.1
R

F1.8
(OUT)

ROL
D =MO
N=1

Operation Results

R0.0
R0.1
M0 $00 $01
(word)

$03

$06 $0D

C 0

1 1 0 1

1 C

0 1 1 0

0 C

0 0 1 1

1 C

0 0 0 1

1 C

0 0 0 0 0

If N = 1, the bits shift by one, and the LSB is always


input from F1.8.

If N = 2, the bits shift by two. The bits are shifted one


position, and the first data input to the LSB is F1.8.
The original MSB is stored in F1.8. The bits are
again shifted one position, with the LSB being set by
the new F1.8, and F1.8 being changed to the state of
the last MSB.

95

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instruction
Mnemonic

Rotate to the Right

ROR

Range
 Bit

Rotate the specified address to


the right with the carry flag

DROR

Byte
Word

Ladder
D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

ROR
D=
N=

MSB

LSB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

p o n m l k j

i h g f e d c b a

carry
(F1.8)

Description
1.

Order:





2.

3.
4.

Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit) including the carry bit.
Input the carry bit (F1.8) to the MSB (most significant bit).
The LSB (least significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).
This instruction is different from the RRC instruction because it sends the LSB to the carry
bit, and the carry bit shifts to the MSB. The input to the MSB can be changed by setting or
clearing the carry bit.
The D register is either a byte or a word. For ROR (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DROR (word), N =
0 to 15.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0

Operation Results

F1.8
(OUT)
R0.0

R0.1
R

ROR
D = M0
N=2

R0.1
$4000
$0000

$1400
$5000

MO
C

0 0 0 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 0 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0
MSB
LSB

0 C

96

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Shift to Left

SHL

Range

Shift to left (high-order bit) by N


bits

DSHL

Lowest bit becomes 0

Bit
 Byte
 Word

Ladder
SHL
D=
N=

carry
(F1.8)

D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

MSB 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a

LSB
0

Description
1.

Order:





2.
3.
4.

Shift N bits to the left (from low-order bit to high-order bit) including the carry bit.
The MSB (most significant bit) moves to the carry bit (F1.8).

The LSB (least significant bit) becomes 0.


Shift the register specified as D to the left by N bits. Each bit will move one position higher in
the register.
The D register is either a byte or a word. For SHL (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DSHL (word), N = 0
to 15.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

97

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DLET
D = MO
S = $FFFF

R0.1
R

DSHL
D = M0
N=2

Operation Results
R0.0
R0.1
$FFF0
$FFFF

$FFFC

M0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Regardless of N, the MSB moves to the carry bit


(F1.8) and the LSB always becomes 0.

The R0.0 input is the initial condition, used to set the


initial value of M0 to $FFFF.

98

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Shift to Right

SHR

Range

Shift to right (low-order bit) by N


bits

DSHR

The highest bit becomes 0

 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
SHR
D=
N=

MSB

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

po n m l

D = Register address
N = Number of bits to rotate

k j i h g f e d c b a

LSB
C

carry
(F1.8)

Description
1.

Order:





2.
3.
4.

Shift N bits to the right (from high-order bit to low-order bit).


MSB (most significant bit) becomes 0.
Fill the carry bit (F1.8) with the LSB (least significant bit).
Shift the register specified as D to the right by N bits. Each bit will move one bit position
lower in the register.
The D register is either a byte or a word. For SHR (byte), N = 0 to 7. For DSHR (word), N =
0 to 15.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DLET
D = M0
S = $FFFF

R0.1
R

DSHR
D = M0
N=1

Time Chart
R0.0
R0.1
$FFFF

$7FFF $3FFF

M0
0

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Regardless of N, the MSB moves to the carry (F1.8)


and the LSB always becomes 0.

The R0.0 input is the initial condition, used to set the


initial value of M0 to $FFFF.

Chapter 6: Instructions

99

Word Conversion Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

BCD Conversion,
Binary Conversion

BCD

BCD: Convert binary to BCD

DBCD

BIN: Convert BCD to binary

BIN

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

DBIN

Ladder
R

BCD
D =
S =

BCD: Convert the S value from binary into BCD and store in D.

BIN
D =
S =

BIN: Convert the S value from BCD into binary and store in D.

Description
1.

2.

3.

BCD: Convert S, which is expressed in binary (byte /word), into BCD and store in D. The
range is as follows:
Byte conversion:
S = 0 to $63 (hex) = 99 (decimal)
D = 0 to $99 (hex) = 153 (decimal)
Word conversion:
S = 0 to $270F (hex) = 9999 (decimal)
D = 0 to $9999 (hex) = 39321 (decimal)
BIN: Convert S, which is expressed in BCD (byte /word), into binary (binary code) and store
in D. The range is as follows:
Byte conversion:
S = 0 to $99 (hex) = 153 (decimal)
D = 0 to $63 (hex) = 99 (decimal)
Word conversion:
S = 0 to $9999 (hex) = 39321 (decimal)
D = 0 to $270F = 9999 (decimal)
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DBCD
D = W2
S = W0
DBIN
D = W3
N = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $07CC = 1996 (decimal)


W1 = $1996 = 6550 (decimal)
W2 = $XXXX
W3 = $XXXX
W0 = $07CC
W1 = $1996
W2 = $1996 = 6550 (decimal)
W3 = $07CC = 1996 (decimal)

100

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Data Exchange

Range

Exchange registers of D1, D2 with  Bit


each other
Byte

XCHG
DXCHG

Word

Ladder
R

XCHG
D1 =
D2 =

Exchange registers D1 and D2 (byte /word) with each other.


D1 => D2, D2 => D1

DXCHG
D1 =
D2 =

D1 ..

0 1 0 1

D1 .. 0 0 1 1

D2 ... 0 0 1 1

D2 .. 0 1 0 1

Description
1.

2.

Exchange registers D1 and D2 with each other (byte/word). For example:


Byte operation:
D1 = $1234 (hex)
D2 = $1278 (hex)
D1 = $5678 (hex)
D2 = $5634 (hex)
Word operation:
D1 = $1234 (hex)
D2 = $5678 (hex)
D1 = $5678 (hex)
D2 = $1234 (hex)
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

XCHG
D1 = W0
D2 = W1
DXCHG
D1 = W10
D1 = W11

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

Operation results:

W0 = $1234
W1 = $5678
W10 = $5678
W11 = $1234
W0 = $1278
W1 = $5634
W10 = $1234
W11 = $5678

Chapter 6: Instructions

101

Instruction
Mnemonic

7-Segment Decoder

Range

Convert the low-order 4 bits of S


 Bit
into 7-segment display format and Byte
store in D
 Word

SEG

Ladder
Convert the value in the low-order 4 bits of address S (0 to 15) into
the proper format for display by a 7-segment display and store in
D. In the converted format, if a bit is 1, the segment is illuminated
(= active high output).

SEG
D=
S=

Description
1.

Convert the value in the low-order 4 bits of address S into SEG display format, and store it in
D. The high-order 8 bits of D do not change. The 8th bit of the D register, used with many 7segment display cells as the decimal point, is not affected by this instruction.
For example: S = $XXX5 (hex)
D = $XX6D (hex)
=5

a
f

S ... 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

c
d

2.

D ... 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
g f e d c b a
dp

c
d

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

SEG
D = W1
S = W0

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = $8765 (hex)
W1 = $1234 (hex)
Operation results:
W0 = $8765 (hex)
W1 = $126D (hex)
The 8th bit of W1 does not change.

102

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Decoder and Encoder with 8421

Range

ENCO

ENCO: 8421 encoder

 Bit

DECO

DECO: 8421 decoder

Byte
 Word

Ladder
R

ENCO
D=
S=

DECO
D =
S =

ENCO: Inspect the S register. If there is a bit in the On state, encode


it (on bit n) and store it in the low-order 8 bits of D. If there are two
or more bits in the S register that are in the On state, only the highest
bit will be processed. The higher 8 bits of D do not change.
DECO: Interpret the lower 4 bits of the S register and store in D.

Description
1.

2.

ENCO: Set D to the value of the bit number of highest bit in S that is On (0 to 16). If there are
two or more On bits in S, use the location of the highest bit. The high-order 8 bits of D do not
change.
DECO: Set the bit location (0 to 15) in D pointed to by the value in the low 4 bits of S. All
other bits in D are reset to 0.
DECO

ENCO
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

S .....

x x x x 0 1 0 1 =5

S 0..0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

invar
iable

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

6+1=7

D 0..0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
15..8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

ENCO

$0000$00
$0001$01
$0002$02
$0004$03
$0008$04
$0010$05

$0020$06
$0040$07
$0080$08
$0100$09
$0200$0A
$0400$0B

$0800$0C
$1000$0D
$2000$0E
$4000$0F
$8000$10

DECO

$0$0001
$1$0002
$2$0004
$3$0008
$4$0010
$5$0020

$6$0040
$7$0080
$8$0100
$9$0200
$A$0400
$B$0800

$C$1000
$D$2000
$E$4000
$F$8000

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

ENCO
D = W2
S = W0
DECO
D = W3
S = W1

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = $0070 (hex)
W1 = $1235 (hex)
W2 = $5678 (hex)
W3 = $9ABC (hex)
Operation results:
W0 = $0070 (hex)
W1 = $1235 (hex)
W2 = $5607 (hex)
W3 = $0020 (hex)
The high-order 8 bits of W2 do not change.

103

104

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Dissemble by 4 bit units/


Unify by 4 bit units

DIS

DIS: Dissemble by 4 bit units

UNI

UNI: Unify by 4 bit units

Range
 Bit
Byte
 Word

Ladder
DIS: Separate Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits each, and store in the
low 4 bits of words starting at D.
UNI: Combine the low 4 bits of Nd+1 words starting at Sr, and
store in D.

DIS
D =
Nd =
Sr =

UNI
D =
Sr =
Nd =

Description
1.

2.

DIS: Separate the word value in register Sr into Nd+1 units of 4 bits each, and store these 4
bit units in sequence into registers starting at D. The 12 remaining high-order bits in each
register become 0.
UNI: Combine the low-order 4 bit units from Nd+1 registers starting at Sr, and store in D.
DIS

UNI

Sr $ 7 4 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
Nd+1
If Nd=3

D
D+1
D+2
D+3

$0000
$0000
$0000
$0000

0
1
0
0

1
1
1
1

0
1
0
1

1
0
0 4
1 7

Nd+1
If Nd=3

3.
4.

Sr
Sr+1
Sr+2
Sr+3

$
$
$
$

0
1
1
0

1
1
0
1

0
1
1
0

1
1
0
0

$ 4 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1

Nd + 1 represents the number of 4-bit segments to dissemble or unify. The range for Nd is
Nd = 0 to 3.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

105

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

DIS
D = W0
Nd = 3
Sr = M0
UNI
D = M10
Sr = W10
Nd = 3

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

M0 = $74E5 (hex)

W10 = $0123 (hex)


W11 = $456F (hex)
W12 = $789A (hex)
W13 = $7654 (hex)
Operation results: M0 = $74E5 (hex)

W10 = $0123 (hex)


W11 = $456F (hex)
W12 = $789A (hex)
W13 = $7654 (hex)

W0 = $1111 (hex)
W1 = $2222 (hex)
W2 = $3333 (hex)
W3 = $4444 (hex)
M10 = $ABCD (hex)

W0 = $0005 (hex)
W1 = $000E (hex)
W2 = $0004 (hex)
W3 = $0007 (hex)
M10 = $4AF3 (hex)

106

D50 PLC User's Manual

Bit Conversion Instruction Details


Instruction
Instruction

Bit Set, Reset, Reverse, Test

Range

BSET

BSET: Nth bit set

 Bit

BRST

BRST: Nth bit reset

 Byte

BNOT

BNOT: Nth bit reverse

Word

BTST

BTST: Nth bit test

Ladder
R

BSET
D=
N=

BNOT
D=
N=

BSET: Set the Nth bit in the D register


(X1).
BNOT: Reverse the Nth bit in the D
register (01, 10).

BRST
D=
N=

BTST
D=
N=

BRST: Reset the Nth bit in the D


register (X0).
BTST: Copy the Nth bit to the carry bit
in the D register (XF1.8).

Description
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

BSET: Set the Nth bit of register D to 1.


BRST: Reset the Nth bit of register D to 0.
BNOT: Reverse the state of the Nth bit of register D.
BTST: Set the carry bit F1.8 to the state of the Nth bit of register D.
These instructions are useful when it is necessary to perform bit-level operations on wordonly memory addresses, such as W, PV, SV, and SR.
BSET

......
if N=5

BRST

......
if N=3

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

BNOT

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
0

BTST

......

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

if N=4
...... 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
......
if N=6

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0
F1.8

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

BSET
D = M0
N=5
BRST
D = M1
N=3
BNOT
D = M2
N=4
BTST
D = M3
N=6

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

M0 = 0001 0010 0001 1100 (binary)


M1 = 0011 0100 0101 1100 (binary)
M2 = 0101 0110 0111 0100 (binary)
M3 = 0111 1000 0111 0100 (binary)
F1.8 = 0 (Off)
Operation results: M0 = 0001 0010 0011 1100 (binary)
M1 = 0011 0100 0101 0100 (binary)
M2 = 0101 0110 0110 0100 (binary)
M3 = 0111 1000 0111 0100 (binary)
F1.8 = 1 (On)

107

108

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Count Number of On (= 1) Bits

SUM

Count On (= 1) bits in the S


register

Range
 Bit
Byte
 Word

Ladder
SUM
D=
S=

SUM: Count the number of On (= 1) bits in the S register and store


the result in the D register.

Description
1.

2.

Count the number of On (= 1) bits in the S register and store the result in the D register.
S 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Number of On(=1) is 11

D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

D=$000B=11 (Decimal)

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

SUM
D = W0
S = M0

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

M0 = 1110 0111 1011 0011 (binary)


W0 = $XXXX (hex)
Operation results: M0 = 1110 0111 1011 0011 (binary)
W0 = $000B (hex) = 11 (decimal)

Chapter 6: Instructions

109

Instruction
Mnemonic

Carry Bit (F1.8) Set, Reset,


Reverse

Range
 Bit

SC

SC: Set carry bit

RC

RC: Reset carry bit

 Byte

CC

CC: Reverse carry bit

 Word

Ladder
SC
R
RC
R

SC: Carry bit set (F1.8: X1).


RC: Carry bit reset (F1.8: X0).

CC
R

CC: Carry bit reverse (F1.8: 01, 1 0).

Description
1.

2.

The carry bit (F1.8) is a special internal flag that holds the result of various types of
mathematical and bit shift operations. When rotating, shifting, adding, or subtracting with a
carry, the operation depends on the state of the carry flag, as well as changes the state of the
carry flag. The above instructions are useful for setting the state of the carry flag as needed for
these types of operations.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

SC

R0.1
R

RC

R0.2
R

CC

Operation Results
R0.0

R0.1
R0.2

F1.8

110

D50 PLC User's Manual

Transfer Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

Load Absolute Address

LDR

Store value at absolute address


Sr in D, D(Sr)

DLDR

Range
 Bit
Byte
Word

Ladder
R

LDR
D =
Sr =

DLDR
D =
Sr =

Store the value located at the absolute address pointed to by Sr into


register D.
R0 word absolute address: 0
M0 word absolute address: 192
W0 word absolute address: 512

Description
1.

2.

3.

This instruction is useful in transferring data patterns stored sequentially in memory, to a


single output register location. For example, if the register addresses W100 through W199
contained a set of 100 control patterns (P0 to P99) that needed to be transferred to theoutputs
of a module (address R015), the LDR instruction can be used to load the data from the
absolute addresses of W100 to W199 (absolute addresses 612 to 711) into the destination
register R015.
In the example below, register W0 is used as the Sr (source) register, which contains the
absolute address of the data patterns to be loaded. Initially, W0 contains 612, which is the
absolute memory address of register W100. As W0 is incremented, it successively points to
the next higher W register to load data from.
See Chapter 5, Absolute Address Designation, for a complete table of absolute addresses.
Control
Pattern
P0
P1
P2
:
:
P98
P99

Register
(Absolute
Address)
W100 (612)
W101 (613)
W102 (614)
:
:
W198 (710)
W199 (711)

Register
Value
$22
$10
$33
:
:
$05
$85

Transfer the data of


W100-W199 ($22, $10,
$33,..., $05, $85)
registers in sequence
into R015. See the
following example.

111

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

INC
D = W0
LDR
D = R15
Sr = W0

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 611

R0.0 (bit)

WO

R2 (word)
process output

611

data of
W100

data of
W101

data of
W102

data of
W198

data of
W199

612

613

614

710

711

$22

$10

$33

$05

$85

112

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Store Absolute Address

STO

Range
 Bit

Store Sr in register at absolute


address D, (D)Sr

DSTO

Byte
Word

Ladder
R

STO
Sr =
D =

DSTO
Sr =
D =

Store the data contained in the Sr register into the register pointed
to by the absolute address contained in register D.
R0 word absolute address: 0 (decimal)
M0 word absolute address: 192 (decimal)
W0 word absolute address: 512 (decimal)

Description
1.

2.

3.

This instruction is useful in storing data patterns from a single input register to a sequential
table of registers in memory. For example, if the process measurements (D0 to D99) from an
input module located at address R001 needed to be stored in register addresses W100 through
W199. The STO instruction can be used to load the data from the source register R001 to the
absolute addresses of W100 to W199 (absolute addresses 612 to 711).
In the example below, register W0 is used as the D (destination) register, which contains the
absolute address of the locations to store the process measurements. Initially, W0 contains
612, which is the absolute memory address of register W100. As W0 is incremented, it
successively points to the next higher W register to store data.
See Chapter 5, Absolute Address Designation, for a complete table of absolute addresses.
Process
Measurement
D0
D1
D2
:
:
D98
D99

Register
(Absolute
Address)
W100 (612)
W101 (613)
W102 (614)
:
:
W198 (710)
W199 (711)

Register
Value
$34
$25
$88
:
:
$17
$09

Store the process


measurement data ($34,
$25, $88,...,$17, $09)
you get from inputs at
001 in sequence into
W100-W199. See the
following example.

113

Chapter 6: Instructions

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

INC
D = W0
STO
Sr = R1
D = W0

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

W0 = 611

R0.0 (bit)

R1
(word process
measurement)
W0 611

$34

$25

$88

$17

$09

612

613

614

710

711

Store in
W100

Store in
W101

Store in
W102

Store in
W198

Store in
W199

114

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Duplicate Word, Duplicate the


Same Word

MOV

MOV: Copy a block of words

FMOV

FMOV: Fill a block of words with


the same value

Range
 Bit
 Byte
Word

Ladder
R

MOV
D =
Sr =
Ns =

MOV: Copy Ns words from Sr to D.

FMOV
D =
Ns =
V =

FMOV: Repeatedly copy the value V, Ns times to words starting at


register address D.

Description
1.
2.

MOV: Copy a total of Ns registers from registers starting at Sr word into registers starting at
D. This instruction is used for mass duplication of blocks of registers.
FMOV: Copy the constant number V, Ns times into registers starting at D. This instruction is
useful for initializing the internal and external memory of certain areas when initializing a
program.
Sr

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

V value

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Sr+1
Sr+2

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D+1
D+2

...... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
...... 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

D+1
D+2
D+3

...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
...... 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

MOV

3.

Ns=3

Ns=4

FMOV

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

115

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

MOV
D = W0
Sr = M0
Ns = 3
FMOV
D = K0
Ns = 4
V = $55AA

Operation Results
Initial conditions:

M0 = $12AA (hex)
M1 = $340F (hex)
M2 = $56F0 (hex)
K0 = $XXXX (hex)
K1 = $XXXX (hex)
Operation results: M0 = $12AA (hex)
M1 = $340F (hex)
M2 = $56F0 (hex)
K0 = $55AA (hex)
K1 = $55AA (hex)

W0 = $XXXX (hex)
W1 = $XXXX (hex)
W2 = $XXXX (hex)
K2 = $XXXX (hex)
K3 = $XXXX (hex)
W0 = $12AA (hex)
W1 = $340F (hex)
W2 = $56F0 (hex)
K2 = $55AA (hex)
K3 = $55AA (hex)

116

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Copy Bit, Copy the Same Bit

Range

BMOV

BMOV: Copy a block of bits

Bit

BFMV

BFMV: Fill a block of bits with the


same bit value

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
R

BMOV
Db =
Sb =
Ns =

BMOV: Copy Ns bits from bit address Sb into bit address D.

BFMV
Db =
Ns =
V =

BFMV: Copy the V bit (0 or 1) into bit address D, Ns times.

Description
1.

2.

BMOV: Copy a block of Ns bits starting at bit address Sb to bit address D. This instruction is
useful for moving large blocks of bits at one time, or for copying sections of bits within a
word without copying the entire word.
BFMV: Fill a block of Ns bits starting at bit address D with the value of V (0 or 1). This
instruction is useful for initializing a set of bits to 0 or 1 at the start of a program or process.
Sb ......

BMOV

If Ns=4
Db ......

3.

If V=1

0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

BFMV

Db ......

If Ns=5
0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

BMOV
Db = R2.3
Sr = R2.1
Ns = 4
BFMV
Db = R3.2
Ns = 5
V =1

Operation Results
R2 before
operation

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

R2 after
operation

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

R3 before
operation

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0

R3 after
operation

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

Chapter 6: Instructions

117

Block Processing Instruction Details


Instruction
Mnemonic

FOR-NEXT Loop

Range

FOR

FOR (DFOR): Start loop

 Bit

DFOR

NEXT: End loop

Byte

NEXT

Word

Ladder
FOR
D =

NEXT

FOR: Begin execution of instructions between (D)FOR and


corresponding NEXT. Repeat execution D times.
NEXT: Decrease D of FOR instruction by 1. If not zero, repeat from FOR
instruction.

Description
1.

2.
3.

4.

5.
6.

The FOR/NEXT instructions are used to perform a block of instructions inside a ladder
program repeatedly. The parameter D of the FOR instruction is a value indicating how many
times the block of instructions is to be performed.
Branch instructions such as JMP and CALL can be made inside the FOR/NEXT loop.
The number of loops to execute (D value) can be changed inside of the FOR/NEXT loop. This
can be used to dynamically increase or decrease the number of loops performed while
processing the loops.
If the D register is 0 before the FOR instruction, the instructions between the FOR and NEXT
instructions will NOT be executed. Instead, the program will jump directly to the instruction
following the NEXT.
As the FOR/NEXT loop occurs within a single program scan, a large value of D will lengthen
the scan time of the program considerably.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

118

D50 PLC User's Manual

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

FOR
D = W0
INC
D = M0
NEXT

Operation Results
Initial condition:

W0 = 10
M0 = 0
Operation results: W0 = 0
M0 = 10
When the R0.0 contact changes from OffOn, execution
of the FOR/NEXT loop occurs. At the FOR instruction,
the value of W0 is evaluated. If W0 is not 0, then the
instructions between the FOR and NEXT (INC D = M0)
is performed. At the NEXT instruction, 1 is subtracted
from the value of W0, and execution returns to the FOR
instruction. This is repeated 10 times, until the value of
W0 is 0. When this occurs, execution goes directly the
instruction following the NEXT instruction.

Chapter 6: Instructions

119

Instruction
Mnemonic

Jump by Pointer

Range

JMP

JMP: Jump by pointer

 Bit

LBL

LBL: Specify the pointer

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
R

JMP
L =

JMP: Jump to the LBL instruction L (L = 0 to 31).

LBL
L =

LBL: Position jumped to by the JMP instruction.


(OUT)

Description
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.

This instruction is used to conditionally perform a set of instructions in the program. When
the input condition to the JMP instruction is true, execution will jump over the following
instructions, directly to the corresponding LBL label. When the input condition is false, the
instructions following the JMP will be executed normally, and no jump occurs.
The range of L is 0 to 31, allowing 32 jumps to be used.
The given L label may only be used once in a program. It may not be duplicated.
For a given JMP with parameter L, there MUST be a corresponding LBL with the same L
value. Also, the LBL instruction must come after the JMP instruction in the program. If either
of these two conditions is not satisfied, an error will occur preventing execution of the
program.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

JMP
L =1

R0.1
R

JMP
L =3

LBL
L =3

LBL
L =1

Operation Results

When contact R0.0 turns On, JMP 1 occurs, and


execution jumps directly to LBL 1the instructions
between the JMP and LBL are not executed.

When contact R0.1 turns On, execution of the


program jumps directly from JMP 3 to LBL 3.

120

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Jump

Range

JMPS

JMPS: Start jump

 Bit

JMPE

JMPE: End jump

 Byte
 Word

Ladder
R

JMPS

JMPS: Jump directly to the corresponding JMPE instruction.

JMPE

JMPE: Position jumped to by JMPS instruction.


(OUT)

Description
1.

2.

3.

4.
5.

The JMPS and JMPE instruction function identically to the JMP and LBL instructions, but do
not require the use of a label. Additionally, the JMPS/JMPE pair may be used more than once
in a program.
This instruction is used to conditionally perform a set of instructions in the program. When
the input condition to the JMPS instruction is true, execution will jump over the following
instructions, directly to the corresponding JMPE. When the input condition is false, the
instructions following the JMPS will be executed normally, and no jump occurs.
For the JMPS instruction, there MUST be a corresponding JMPE. Also, the JMPE instruction
must come after the JMPS instruction in the program. If either of these two conditions is not
satisfied, an error will occur preventing execution of the program.
The JMPS/JMPE instructions may NOT be nestedafter each JMPS instruction, there must
be a JMPE instruction before the next JMPS instruction may be programmed.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

121

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

JMPS

JMPE

R0.1
R

JMPS

JMPE

Operation Results
By executing a JMPS:

When contact R0.0 or R0.1 turns On, execution of


the program jumps directly from the associated JMPS
to its corresponding JMPE.

122

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic

Call Subroutine

Range

CALL

CALL: Call subroutine

 Bit

SBR

SBR: Start subroutine

 Byte

RET

RET: End subroutine

 Word

Ladder
CALL
Sb =

SBR
Sb =

RET

CALL: Call subroutine Sb (Sb = 0 to 31)


SBR: Start Subroutine
RET: Return from Subroutine

Description
1.

The subroutine instructions are used when a block of instructions needs to be called more than
once, or called with different values, from the main program.

2.

The subroutine to be called is specified by the Sb parameter in the CALL and SBR
instructions. The CALL instruction causes execution to jump to the specified SBR instruction.
After executing the instructions between SBR and RET, program execution is returned to the
instruction following the CALL instruction that called the subroutine.

3.

The subroutine defined by the SBR and RET instructions must come after the associated
CALL instruction. All subroutines must be defined and programmed at the end of the control
program. A total of 64 subroutines are available (Sb = 0 to 31).

4.

The same subroutine (SBR Sb) can be called by multiple CALL instructions. However, each
subroutine number may only be used once by an SBR instruction.

5.

This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Chapter 6: Instructions

123

Example
Program Expression
R0.0
R

CALL
Sb = 3

R0.1
R

CALL
Sb = 3

SBR
Sb = 3

RET

Operation Results
When contact R0.0 and/or R0.1 turns On, the CALL Sb =
3 instruction is executed and the instructions between
SBR Sb = 3 and RET are executed. After executing this
subroutine, the program returns to the next instruction
after the CALL.

124

D50 PLC User's Manual

Instruction
Mnemonic
WAT

Clear Watchdog Time


WAT: Clear watchdog time

Range
 Bit
 Byte
 Word

Ladder
WAT

WAT: Clears the watchdog timer while executing the program.

Description
1.

2.

This instruction clears the watchdog timer within the CPU module to prevent the program
from stopping even if the scan time exceeds the maximum watchdog time. The default
watchdog time is 3 seconds.
Under normal operation, the PLC executes the following process:





3.

4.

Read external inputs.


Process the control program.
Update the external outputs.
One execution of this process is termed a scan. When the time it takes to process a single scan
(the scan time) is excessively long, abnormal results may occur caused by the delay in reading
inputs and updating outputs. For this reason, a watchdog time is set by the PLC which, when
exceeded, indicates that an error has occurred. When this happens, the PLC stops the program
to prevent abnormal operation.
Under certain circumstances, extremely lengthy scan times may be allowable. The WAT
instruction allows the user to reset the watchdog timer to prevent the PLC from automatically
going into the error condition and stop mode when the watchdog time is exceeded.
This operation will occur on every scan for which the input condition is true (On). To perform
the operation only on a change of input condition, use the rising/falling edge contact.

Example
Program Expression
M0.0

WAT

Operation Results
In certain applications, the user program may contain
loops which cause lengthy scan times. In the example,
turning on M0.0 prevents the PLC from stopping when
the watchdog time (maximum of 3 sec) is exceeded. For
normal PLC control applications, this instruction should
not be used.

Chapter 6: Instructions

Instruction
Mnemonic
END

End Control Program


END: End control program
(Inserted automatically)

Range
 Bit
 Byte
 Word

Ladder
END

Description
1.
2.

This instruction indicates the end of the control program.


This instruction is automatically added by GPC. It is not programmed by the user.

125

126

D50 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

Testing and Troubleshooting

This chapter provides information on testing and troubleshooting the D50 PLC.
This chapter discusses:

Testing procedures for the D50 PLC

How to troubleshoot the D50 PLC

127

128

D50 PLC User's Manual

Test Precautions
When checking the system:

CAUTION: Always turn off the power whenever you install or remove a module.
1.

Check the module more than one time before exchanging the part.

2.

Include a complete description of the symptoms when you return a defective module for
repair.

3.

When you suspect that a contact may be defective, it might only need cleaning. Clean the
contact using a clean cotton cloth and alcohol. Then retest the module.

4.

Do not use thinner to clean any of the parts.

System Checks
Before installing the I/O wiring of the PLC and supplying power, check the following items.

Check the connection


of the power cable

Check the connection


of the I/O expansion
module cables

Check the grounding

Verify proper wiring of


the emergency stop
circuit

Check the power


source

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

Item

What to Check

The connection of the power Check that the wiring is secure and intact.
cable and the I/O expansion
Check that the terminal screws are tightly fastened.
cables.
Check that I/O module is firmly fixed.
Check that the power cable connection is secure.
Check that the cable size is correct.
Grounding

Check that the grounding is triple grounded and


separate from other device grounds.

Emergency stop circuit

Check that the emergency stop circuit for problems


external to the PLC is wired accurately, and will
IMMEDIATELY disconnect power on demand.

Power source

Check that the power and voltage sources are within


specifications.
For 110/220 VAC (85 to 264 VAC)
For 24 VDC (20 to 28 VAC)
Check that the voltage to AC-type I/O is within
specifications.

129

130

D50 PLC User's Manual

Testing Procedures
When the PLC has been installed and wired, begin testing in the following order.

Supply Power

Initialize Memory

Check I/O Wiring

Programming

Testing

Correct Program

Store Program

End

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

Item

What to Check/Do

Power source

Check that the input voltage to the power supply is within specification.

131

Check that the control voltage to the I/O is within specification.


Turn on the power source.
Check the LED display on the controller.
Initialize memory

Initialize the PLC module using GPC. (This clears the program in the PLC.)

Check I/O wiring

Check the LEDs of the input modules and use the monitor function of GPC after
testing the input device.
Check the wiring of the output by turning the output On/Off using the monitor mode of
GPC (set PLC to Run mode).

Programming

Check the program.


Download the program into the CPU module.

Testing

Check the Run LED for illumination by setting the mode switch of the controller to
Run.
Check for the proper operation of the program.

Correct
programming

Correct any program errors.

Store program

Store the program onto a floppy disk or similar storage device and place in a secure
place.

Program is stored.

Record the PLC type, program capacity, name of installation, and date for the
recorded program.
Print the program (ladder, mnemonic) and store it in a secure place.

132

D50 PLC User's Manual

Correcting Errors
System Check
Refer to the system check flow chart when you encounter problems during startup and testing.

System Check Flowchart

Is RUN LED
ON or Flashing?

No

Go to the Power Supply


Check flowchart

No

Go to the RUN
Check flowchart

Yes

Go to the Error
Check flowchart

Yes

Is PLC in Run
(RUN LED On)?

Yes

Is ERR LED
illuminated?
No

Are I/O modules


operating normally?
Yes

Replace the faulty module/


Correct the program

No

Go to the I/O
Check flowchart

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

Power Supply Check


Power Supply
Check Flowchart

Is power being
applied to the
terminals?

No

Supply power

Yes
No

Is the voltage
within the specified
range?

No

Is RUN LED
On or Flashing?

Yes

Adjust voltage within


the specified range

Yes
No

Are the terminal


screws loose?

No

Is RUN LED
On or Flashing?

Yes

Tighten the
terminal screws

Yes
No

Replace the controller

Is RUN LED
On or Flashing?

Yes

END

133

134

D50 PLC User's Manual

Run Check
RUN Check Flowchart

Is the controller
mode switch set
to RUN?

No

Set mode switch to RUN

Yes
No

Is RUN LED On?

Yes
Place in Run
using GPC - Is RUN
LED On?

Yes

END

No

Is the ERR
LED illuminated?

Yes

Go to the Error
Check flowchart

No

Is the ERR LED


illuminated?

No
Set the controller mode
switch to STOP

Clear the PLC program


using GPC*

Set the controller mode


switch to RUN

Is the RUN LED


illuminated?

Yes
Check the PLC program,
and reload

No

Replace the controller

Yes
Go to the Error
Check flowchart

*Be certain to save the program before clearing the PLC program so it is not lost.

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

Error Check
Error Check Flowchart

Are any
of the bits from
F0.0 to F0.7 in the
ON state?

Yes

No

F0.0 = 1

System Error Resupply Power

F0.1 = 1

System ROM Error Resupply Power

F0.2 = 1

System RAM Error Resupply Power

F0.3 = 1

User program Error Download the program


again

F0.4 = 1

Program Syntax Error Correct the program, and


download again

F0.6 = 1

Module Change Error Resupply Power

F0.7 = 1

Module Error Resupply Power

No

Is bit F1.7
in the ON state?

Yes

K Register Error Clear K registers, or


Resupply Power

No
No

Is the ERR LED


illuminated?

Yes

Is bit F1.7
in the ON state?

Yes

No
Go to the System
Check flowchart

Replace the controller

Are any
of the bits from
F0.0 to F0.7 in the
ON state?

135

136

D50 PLC User's Manual

I/O Check
This page presents an example of a troubleshooting procedure to follow when errors are encountered
with the external I/O. In this example, two of the inputs on the controller are used to control an output
on the controller. This flow chart is based on the following circuit, and assumes that the error
encountered is that the output connected to R15.0 is not turned On when it should be.
R0.2

R0.3

R15.0
(OUT)

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

137

138

D50 PLC User's Manual

Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Inspection Tables


The following tables list some common problems and troubleshooting procedures for the PLC system
in the event of faulty operation. Additionally, a table is provided which covers the routine maintenance
procedures to be followed to ensure long life of the PLC system with minimum downtime and
maintenance cost.
System Operation
Symptom

Expected Cause

Troubleshooting

Run LED will not illuminate.

Program errors

Correct the program.

Power line defect

Replace the CPU module.

Output will not turn to On state during Run.

Short or open circuit

Replace the CPU module.

I/O Modules above a certain address will not operate.

I/O bus error

Check I/O expander cable.

Not all points on an I/O module operate properly.

I/O bus error

Check I/O expander cable.

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

139

Digital Inputs
Symptom

Expected Cause

Troubleshooting

No inputs on the module will


turn On (LEDs are not
illuminated).

No external input power

Supply power.

Low external input voltage

Make sure full voltage is being


supplied.

Terminal screw is loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect the module

Inputs will not turn to On state


(LEDs are illuminated).

Defective input circuit

Replace the module.

One or more inputs on an I/O


module will not turn On.

Device connected to input module is


defective.

Replace the input device.

Loose input wiring

Reconnect the input wiring.

External input time is too short.

Adjust the input device.

Terminal screw is loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect module

One or more inputs on an I/O


module will not turn Off.

Defective input circuit

Replace the module.

Input changes On/Off state


erratically.

Low external input voltage

Make sure full supply voltage is being


input.

Noise error

Troubleshoot for noise.

Terminal screw is loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect module

LED error
Input display LED will not
illuminate (input is On in PLC).

Replace the module.

140

D50 PLC User's Manual

Digital Outputs
Symptom

Expected Cause

Troubleshooting

No outputs on the module will


turn On.

No external input power

Supply power.

Low external input voltage

Make sure full voltage is being


supplied.

Terminal screw is loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect module

I/O contact connection

Replace the module.

Defective output circuit

Reconnect the module.

One or more outputs on an I/O Output circuit error


module will not change to On
or Off state.

Replace the module.

Output on an I/O module will


not turn Off (LED is not
illuminated).

Output time too short

Correct the program.

Defective output circuit

Replace the module.

Output on an I/O module will


not turn Off (LED is
illuminated).

Incorrect output load

Replace the output load.

Loose output wiring

Reconnect the output wiring.

Terminal screw is loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect module

Output contact error

Replace the module of the relay.

Defective output circuit

Replace the module.

Output on an I/O module will


not turn On (LED is
illuminated).

Output contact error

Replace the module of the relay.

Leakage current to low-current load

Apply leakage current protection

Output on an I/O module will


not turn On (LED is not
illuminated).

Defective output circuit

Replace the module.

Output changes On/Off state


erratically.

Low external input voltage

Make sure full supply voltage is being


input.

Noise error

Troubleshoot for noise.

Terminal screw loose/


Defective contact

Tighten screw/
Reconnect module

Common terminal screw loose

Tighten the screw.

Defective contact/
Terminal connector

Reconnect the module.

CPU module error

Replace the CPU module.

LED error

Replace the module.

All outputs on a module with


the same common operate
incorrectly or identically.

Output display LED is not on


(output is On to field device).

Chapter 7: Testing and Troubleshooting

141

Periodic Inspection and Preventive Maintenance


The D50 PLC Series requires regular inspection and maintenance for proper operation. The following
items should be checked every six months.
Item

What to Check

Supplied
Power

Does the voltage measured within the Voltage must fall within the power
module input voltage specifications.
power terminal fall within the
specified range?

Environment

Does the temperature fall within the


specified range?

0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

Thermometer

Does the humidity fall within the


specified range?

Humidity levels below 20% RH.

Hygrometer

Is there any dust present?

No dust.

Visual

I/O Power

Does the control voltage supplied to


the I/O modules fall within the
specified limit?

Control voltage must fall within the


input and output modules
specifications.

Voltmeter

Module
Mounting and
Wiring

Are all of the modules secure?

All should be firmly secured.

Screwdriver

Is the connection cable secure?


Is the external wiring screw loose?

Criteria

Test
Equipment
Voltmeter

142

D50 PLC User's Manual

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

143

Troubleshooting Noise Problems

This chapter outlines the various causes of noise that affect the D50 PLC system. Installation tips and
troubleshooting methods for identifying noise problems are also provided.
This chapter discusses:

The causes of noise

Installation tips for avoiding noise

Methods to identify and resolve noise problems

144

D50 PLC User's Manual

Noise Occurrence
Types of Noise

Radiation noise is transmitted in the form of a magnetic wave. The amplitude of the magnetic
wave is measured in Gauss.

Conduction noise is transmitted through a direct path such as signal wiring or ground
connections as a strong, high-voltage surge. This type of noise is measured as voltage,
current, or power.

Normal mode (single ended developed) noise can come through the power and/or the signal
cables. This type of noise is not equally distributed across the PLC input terminals.

Common mode noise can come through the power and/or the signal cables. In this case the
noise is close to the same amplitude thus the term common on both leads of the cable.

Impulse noise is electrical or magnetic energy that has less than a 200 msec pulse duration.

Surge noise is electrical energy that has a pulse duration of 200 msec to 2 sec.

Transient noise is electrical energy that has an extremely short duration usually lasting only a
few nanoseconds (1 x 10-9).

Electrical Noise Fundamental Definitions

Isolation means to physically separate the connection between areas. Isolation is effective for
common mode noise.

Filters are effective against conduction noise such as impulses. Filtering is used to remove
normal mode noise and common mode noise that has been imprinted onto the signal or power
cables. A low-pass filter passes only low frequency signals. Low-pass filters are classified as
either LC (L = inductor and C = capacitor) filters or RC (R = resistor and C = capacitor)
filters, according to the electrical parts that form the filter.

Surge absorbers are devices that protect electronic equipment by clamping down extremely
high voltage spikes (lightning strikes) in power cables to a safe level.

Charge is an excess or deficiency of electrons in an object. When an object becomes charged,


a magnetic field forms around the object and can radiate noise as the amplitude of the charge
is varied.

An inductive load is a device which creates a large magnetic field that opposes any change in
the voltage applied across the device. Devices that act as inductive loads are relay coils, motor
coils, starter coils and actuator coils.

Stray capacitance and inductance is created during the installation of an electrical system.
When excess cabling is left wound up this creates stray inductance in the form of a coil. All
cabling inherently has a capacitive rating (so many picofarads per meter). Excessively long
cable runs or untrimmed cable lengths or poorly specified cable types can add large levels of
stray capacitance.

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

145

Sources of Noise
There are three main sources of noise. Some of these sources generate large noise amplitudes. The
occurrence time can be very short (impulse type) or continuous (power line induced). Some noise
levels can damage the D50 PLC components and peripheral devices.
1.

Noise Generated by Electronic Equipment


All electronic devices radiate noise in the form of a magnetic field. The magnetic field is
created around the printed circuit board or the wiring of electronic devices due to the flow of
electrical current. The amplitude of the magnetic field changes over time due to changes in
the flow of the electrical current. The magnetic field strength increases as the amount of the
electrical current flow increases.
As a device crosses the magnetic field, electrical currents will be induced. The induced
current could be summed vectorially with the normal electrical currents. In some cases this
could cause cancellation of electrical current flow (essentially shutting down the circuit). In
other cases this could create large surge currents that cause severe damage to the circuit. In
most cases the summation of the currents cause errors in readout and control values. Some
sources of this kind of noise are relays, magnetic contactors, inverters, computer monitors,
and motors.

2.

Noise from Power Cables


When various loads are connected to a single power source the current draw conditions and
impedance imbalance can cause unwanted noise. The noise created by these sources can
affect other devices connected to the power source, via spikes, sags, reflected high speed
switching noise, and ground pulse. This is the most frequent cause of noise in a PLCs
environment.

3.

Noise from Natural Causes and Work Practices


Lightning, welding, shared cable trays, grandfatherd plant wiring, and static electricity can
also be sources of noise.

In the first case, the noise is caused within the equipment and is called internal noise. In the second
case, the noise is caused by external factors and referred to as external noise. These two types of noise
may also be referred to as artificial system noise.
The noise caused by natural occurrences can not be prevented, but can be controlled. Precautions such
as good grounding techniques, surge suppressors, and burying cables underground can help minimize
the affect. This type of noise may be referred to as natural noise.

146

D50 PLC User's Manual

Advised Installation Practices


Shield the PLC
The most common method of shielding, is to install the PLC inside a grounded steel enclosure.

Proper Cable Selection


Use twisted, shielded-pair cable for the power cable and field wiring. Properly terminate the shields of
all cables to a single-point high-quality ground. (See section on shielding.)

Ground the PLC


The purpose of grounding the PLC is to protect the electronic equipment from electric shock and
harmful noise.
To ground the PLC, connect a 12 to 16 gauge wire from the frame ground terminal strip screw of the
controller to a high quality earth ground (less then 2 ). Since electrical currents always take the path
of least resistance, the noise currents induced by a magnetic field will flow through the PLC frame
ground terminal screw to earth ground. This essentially draws the noise away from the PLC modules.
The most effective method of grounding the PLC frame is to ground the PLC independent of other
equipment. Avoid grounding the PLC through a daisy chain of wire connections with other equipment.
See figures below for good and bad examples:

PLC

Others

PLC

Others

PLC

Others

The length of the ground cable should not exceed 65 feet (20 m). For best results, the resistance of the
ground cable should be less than 2 .

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

147

Isolation and Filtering Techniques


Isolation
There are several methods of isolation:

Attach an isolation transformer between the PLC power supply and the VAC source to help
remove noise that flows in the power cable. Try to attach the isolation transformer as near to
the PLC power supply input terminal strip as possible.

Some isolation transformers come with a shield that can be grounded. This shield, when
properly grounded, enhances the transformers ability to remove unwanted spikes.

Be certain to size the isolation transformer to handle the necessary power rating required by
the system. A good practical rule in specifying an isolation transformer is to multiply the
required load capability by 1.35 (35% additional deliverable power). This allows expansion of
the PLC system at a later date without the immediate need to upgrade the isolation
transformer.
Isolation
Transformer
I
AC power

PLC
AC input
Ground
terminal
Triple ground (Less than 2 of
ground resistance)

When heavy noise is expected, also use an isolation transformer on the AC control power to
the I/O modules and devices. A cost-effective way of specifying the isolation transformer for
this requirement would be to specify a transformer with multiple primary and secondary
windings and wiring the PLC as shown below. Again, be certain to size the isolation
transformer to handle the necessary power required plus a 35% surplus and additional
windings to allow for future expansion of the system.

Breaker

Breaker Isolation Transformer


PLC power

AC power
Load
PLC input

148

D50 PLC User's Manual

Filters
Filters should be used to suppress high frequency noise.
When using a low-pass filter specify one that is designed for power line applications. Many different
types are available from simple modules to complex units.
A single device is not necessarily the most cost-effective device for all applications. In specifying the
proper filter one must take into account the amplitude/power level of the noise and how often the noise
is present.
When the proper device is selected it is best to place the device as close to the PLC power supply
connections as possible. Below is an example of how to install a filter. The chart lists a typical
midrange power line filter for reference.
Filter
AC power

PLC
AC input
Ground
terminal
Triple ground (Less than 100
of ground resistance)

For installation and application details, refer to the manufacturers manuals.


Model Name

Manufacturer

Remarks

PQI-3120N12

Superior Electric, DANA/


Warner Electric Division

Used for 120 V power

PQI-3220N12

Superior Electric, DANA/


Warner Electric Division

Used for 240 V power

The PQI-3120N12 and PQI-3220N12 come in a NEMA 12 rated enclosure.

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

149

Methods of Handling Large Voltage Spikes Such as Lightning


Surge Absorber

A surge absorber reduces the electrical shock to the PLC by taking high-voltage spikes to
ground. Attach a surge absorber in the power line in front of the PLC to prevent damage from
lightning. The surge absorber will clamp the unwanted high voltage and prevent it from
flowing to the PLC power supply. When specifying a surge absorber, the present wiring
system must be carefully reviewed. Some surge absorbers are designed to be placed into the
main power distribution panel while others are designed to be installed in the field close to the
PLC. It is always best to place the surge absorber as close to the PLC as possible.

Surge absorbers can consist of either series resistors with capacitors that will couple the spike
to ground, or Zener diodes that safely clamp the high voltage spikes or MOVs (Metal Oxide
Varistors). Some surge absorbers will need replacement after they have suppressed a spike
(similar to a fuse). Others can be reset. In specifying a surge absorber consider how often the
surges are occurring and the maximum amplitude in volts or joules.

U
AC power

Main breaker

Breaker

Transformer

PLC

AC input

V
Surge Absorber
Special ground (Less than 2
of ground resistance)
It is needed to prevent high voltage
noise such as lightning

Ground
terminal
Triple ground (Less than 2
of ground resistance)

Some typical surge absorbers are listed in the following table. For actual installation and
application details, refer to manufacturers manuals.
Model Name

Specifications

Manufacturer

Remarks

CHSA

470 V

Cutler-Hammer

120/240 V power

CHSA01

490 V

Cutler-Hammer

120/240 V power

Burying Wire

Cabling that is strung from pole to pole in free space is an antenna for lightning. When
possible bury the cable underground. The earth acts like a shield and absorbs most if not all of
the lightning induced noise signals before they are able to reach the cable.

150

D50 PLC User's Manual

Shielding Cabling

When the wiring for the I/O module is more than 165 ft (50 m), shield the wire by installing it
in ferrous (steel) conduit and use shielded wire. Attach the conduit/shield to the ground at the
PLC ground terminal as shown below.
PLC
In

Use shield wires,


or shield the wire

COM
Ground
terminal
Ground (ground resistance
less than 2 )

Separate the input and output module wiring, and power circuit cables. Make sure to properly
ground the shields of each cable directly to ground. Do not create a daisy chain of ground
jumpers over several feet and then pigtail one end lead to ground. This method allows
multiple ground current paths to exist and can induce noise.

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

151

Methods to Handle I/O Inductive Loads


Several methods exist for handling I/O inductive loads.

DC Input Module
Attach a diode in a reverse biased direction parallel to the inductive load, as close as possible to the
load.
DC input module
IN
Inductive
load

Flywheel
diode

COM

DC power

AC Input Module
Attach an RC network parallel to the inductive load.
AC input module
IN
Inductive
load

R
C

COM

Handling Long Cable Runs


When a long cable run is needed to attach the AC input module to an external input device attach a
surge suppressor parallel to the input module. When possible, convert the application so a DC input
module can be used instead of the AC input module. The input circuitry of DC input modules
inherently have filters that suppress noise and therefore are less affected by the noise from inductive
loads and stray wiring capacitance.
AC input module
IN
wiring is long

R
C

RIN

COM
In case of AC power

Protecting Against Arcing


When a relay output module switches an inductive load, a surge voltage measured in thousands of
volts is generated across the relay contacts. This causes arcing (an electrical discharge between two
contact points that can vaporize the contact material) and shortens the contact life of the relay.
Eventually this arcing can destroy the relay contacts. Below is a chart of some methods to protect the
relay contacts.

152

D50 PLC User's Manual

Countermeasures

Attach a surge
suppressor:

Application
AC
Load

DC
Load

Relay output
Inductive load module
OUT

COM

Characteristics

Selection of Parts

If the load is a relay or a solenoid,


the load is slow to return to the
normal status. When using a DC
power source, place the surge
suppressor across the inductive
load.

For a contact voltage of 1 V and a


contact current of 1 A, use the
following C and R values:

When using an AC power source,


place the surge suppressor across
the switching relay contacts.

Another example; for a contact


current of 0.5 A and a contact
voltage of 200 VAC use the
following C and R values:

C: 0.5-1.0 F
R: 0.5-1.0

C: 0.25-0.5 F
The example shows how to connect
R: 100-200
the surge suppressor for a DC
power source
For DC circuits use a minimum of a
250 V rated capacitor. For AC
circuits use a minimum of a 1000 V
rated capacitor.
Attach a flyback
diode:

Relay output
Inductive load module
OUT

The time required to return to the


normal status is longer than the
surge suppressor method.

COM

Attach a varistor:
Relay output
Inductive load module
OUT

COM

The diode connected in parallel


allows the energy accumulated in
the inductive load to flow back into
the inductive load in the form of an
electrical current. The energy is
then dissipated as heat based on
the resistance of the inductive load.

A varistor functions as a voltage


clamping device. When the applied
voltage exceeds the rated voltage
value of the varistor, the varistor
turns on, creating a short circuit
connection across the inductive
load.
This method has a slow recovery
time.
When using a DC power source,
place the varistor across the
inductive load.
When using an AC power source,
place the varistor across the
switching relay contacts.

Use diodes with low reverse


leakage current and with a reverse
voltage value that is at least three
times greater than the nominal
applied voltage. Verify the diode
has the proper power rating.
The steady state current that flows
when the inductive load is turned on
should be greater than the current
produced when the inductive load is
turned off.
To specify the varistor do the
following:
Chose a maximum continuous
voltage rating just above the
expected applied voltage.
Chose a varistor that can handle
the energy level that will be
generated by the inductive load
BUT avoid overspecifying. As the
varistors energy level capability
goes up so does the capacitance
which will slow down the response
time of the system.

Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Noise Problems

153

Warning
The following two protection methods should be avoided. Each of these methods can be effective in
removing the sparks when power to the inductive load is turned off. However when power is turned on
to the inductive load there will be a high inrush current applied across the relay contacts as they are
mating. Since all relay contacts have some bounce while mating, arcing will occur and potentially melt
the relay contact points. This is the reason for having the resistor in the RC network described earlier.
Inductive load

Inductive load

OUT

OUT

C
Power

Power
COM

COM

Transistor Output Moduleit is best to attach a flyback diode parallel to the inductive load,
as close as possible to the load. In this configuration output switching frequency should be
held to less than 20 times per minute.
Transistor output module

Inductive load

OUT

COM

SSR Output Moduleattach a surge suppressor parallel to the inductive load, as close as
possible to the load. In this configuration output switching frequency should be held to less
than 20 times per minute.
Inductive load

SSR output module


OUT

R C

COM

154

D50 PLC User's Manual

Troubleshooting

Noise from magnetic fields induced by other electrical/electronic equipment onto the PLC can
be avoided by relocating the PLC during the design process, installing the PLC in a grounded
steel enclosure, or attaching a filtering or suppression shield/circuit to the device which is
generating the magnetic field.

Noise from power cables can be corrected by using a different ground for the PLC, an
isolation transformer, attaching a line/ground filter, or changing the power wire connection of
the PLC so that it is closer to the source of the power, therefore lowering the power source
impedance.

Noise from lightning should be suppressed by use of surge suppressors that are specifically
designed to protect electronic equipment from lightning.

Whenever welding near an electronic device, care must be used to avoid connecting the
ground cable of the welder to a ground of the electronic device. One method of protecting the
PLC is to disconnect the PLC from power and lifting all power and ground connection. An
alternate method is to establish two separate grounds, one for electronic equipment and one
for welding. Test the ground separation carefully before having electronic equipment up and
running while welding.

The quickest way to avoid noise from shared cable trays is to have two cable tray runs. One
for power and power control cabling and the other for electronic equipment and low level
control wiring. Proper cable selection with good shielding properties in some instances will
allow both types of cabling/wiring to co-exist in the same tray system.

Grandfatherd plant wiring has to be analyzed on a case by case basis. The best approach is
to always install new cabling, conduit, and cable tray runs. Though this may not always be
practical, it removes the surprise of high noise and system problems during system startup.

Static electricity suppression requires good grounding practices throughout the plant. Static
electricity is a potential difference developed on a material surface due to the loss of protons
or electrons. Since rubbing action can cause the build up of static electricity, the best
protection is to have the electronic equipment enclosed in a grounded housing that requires
the user to first make contact with a safe discharge path. In high static environments like
styrofoam manufacturing or glass manufacturing, electronic equipment should always be
protected from static electricity.

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

155

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication


Protocol

The D50 PLC communication protocol provides a simple, yet complete method of communications
between the Cutler-Hammer program loader software (GPC) and the PLC. Using the open protocol
outlined in this appendix, the user can quickly and easily expand the capabilities of the overall PLC
system by communicating to the PLC using a variety of peripheral communications equipment such as
operator interfaces and computers. Additionally, the communications protocol allows for multiple
Cutler-Hammer D50, D300, and D320 PLCs to communicate to a central computer on a single
network using RS-485, at distances of up to 4000 ft (1.2 km).

156

D50 PLC User's Manual

Communication Rules
Communication Environment
The D50 PLC communications protocol uses the following settings:

Half Duplex Asynchronous

No Parity

1 Stop bit

Communication method: RS485

Communication speed: 9600 bps

Number of PLCs on a single network: Maximum of 32 (communicating 1:N using RS485)

Maximum communication delay time: 3 sec

Communication Protocol
Step 1
Query (Q)
Set the network ID number for the PLC to communicate with and send a Q signal from the peripheral
device to the PLC.

Step 2
Query Acknowledge (QA)
A QA signal is sent from the PLC to the peripheral device, indicating that the Q signal from the
peripheral device was received.

Step 3
Response Request (RR)
An RR signal goes from the peripheral device to the PLC, indicating that the QA signal from the PLC
was received, and requesting the final data response. This signal is sent when QQA is normal.

Step 4
Response (R)
When the PLC receives the RR from the peripheral device, it sends an R signal which gives the results
of the original Q signal sent by the peripheral device. The communication cycle for one function code
ends when the PLC sends the R.

157

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

Step 5
Repeated Response
Once the original Q has been sent to the D50 PLC, the R message containing the requested data for
that query can be repeatedly received by sending only the RR message again.

Communications Delay
The D50 PLC will return a signal after receiving a Q or an RR within a specific time. However, due to
errors in the communications network, CRC values, and communication speed flux, there are
occasions when the PLC will not receive the signal from the peripheral device. The peripheral device
should allow up to three seconds for a response from the PLC. If there are no responses to the Q or the
RR message, the communication is considered to have failed, and the Q or RR should be sent again.

Example
1.

No communication error.
For the internal processing of the PLC CPU
send RR at least 5 msec after receiving QA.
Peripheral device
Q

QA

RR

PLC

2.

When QA is not received.


3 sec
Peripheral device
Q

QA

RR

RR

RR

PLC

3.

When R is not received.


3 sec
Peripheral device
Q

QA

RR

QA

RR

PLC

4.

Repeated Response communications.

Peripheral device
Q
PLC

158

D50 PLC User's Manual

CPU ID
All devices connected to the network need a network ID number for communication. There is an
available range of 0 to 191 network ID numbers. Redundancy is not permitted. When a single PLC and
a peripheral device are connected, usually 0, 1, or 255 is assigned as the network ID number to the
PLC. When the peripheral device wishes to communicate to a connected PLC regardless of its
programmed network ID number, it can use global network ID number 255, to which any PLC will
respond. When several CPU modules are connected to one communication network, they must use
individual ID numbers from 0 to 191. The PLCs network ID number is configured using the GPC
program loader software.

Function Codes Included in the Query

Each function code is 1 byte. When the PLC receives a query (Q), the function code of the
final response (R) is formed by adding $80 (hex) to the function code sent by the query.

The function code of the R message can be used by the peripheral device to verify that the
correct Q message has been received by the PLC.

Communication function
* $ notes hexadecimal notations
Query Function Code

Response Function Code

Read Bits

Communication Function

$01

$81

Write Bits

$02

$82

Read Words

$03

$83

Write Words

$04

$84

Read Bits and Words

$05

$85

Write Bits and Words

$06

$86

Read Program

$07

$87

Write Program

$08

$88

Read Instruction

$09

$89

Change Instruction

$0A

$8A

Change Parameter

$0B

$8B

Insert Instruction

$0C

$8C

Delete Instruction

$0D

$8D

Find Instruction

$0E

$8E

Find Parameter

$0F

$8F

Delete Section

$10

$90

No Service

$00

$00

Note: Function codes $07 to $10 are used for programming and system control functions, and are
beyond the scope of this manual. Please contact Cutler-Hammer technical support for more
information.
Note: The bit/word address assignment uses the absolute address method for reading memory
locations. (See Chapter 5 for memory map.)

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

159

Cyclic Redundancy Checking (CRC)

The CRC is a 2-byte checksum that is calculated from the data of every message and then
attached to the end of the message by the sender. It is used as an error-checking device to
prevent loss or corruption of data during transmission of the message.

The sender of the message calculates and attaches the CRC when it generates and sends the
message. The receiver should also calculate the CRC from the data of the message and
compare the calculated value to the CRC that was sent. If the calculated CRC does not match
the CRC received, an error has occurred in the message during transmission.

CRC Calculation Range


DA

SA

Function

Length

Information

CRC Calculation Range

CRC L

CRC H

2 Bytes

The following subroutines illustrate the program code required to calculate the CRC for a message.
The initial value of the CRC (CRC_Sum) is set to 65535 ($FFFF). Then one of these subroutines
would be called once for each byte (data) of the CRC calculation range shown above.

CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (BASIC)


1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060

CRC_Sum: CRC-16 reserve code after the calculation (CRC content to be sent at end of message)
Data: CRC-16 Data input to be calculated (Byte Data from message)
CRC_Sum = CRC_Sum XOR Data
FOR I=1 to 8
CARRY=CRC_Sum AND 1
CRC_Sum=CRC_Sum SHR 1
IF CARRY=1 THEN CRC_Sum XOR 0A001H
NEXT I
RETURN

CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (PASCAL)


Procedure CRC16(Data : Byte)
Var i : Byte;
Begin
CRC_Sum := CRC_Sum x or Data;
for i : 1 to 8 do
begin
if((CRC_Sum and 1)=1) then CRC_Sum := (CRC_Sum shr 1) xor $A001;
else CRC_Sum := CRC_Sum shr 1;
end;
End;

CRC-16 Calculation Subroutine (C)


void Crc16(unsigned int Data) {
unsigned int i;
Crc=Crc^(Data & 0x00FF);
for(i=0;i<=7;I++) {
if((Crc & 0x0001) == 0x0001) Crc=(Crc>>1)^0xA001;
else Crc=Crc>>1;
}
}

160

D50 PLC User's Manual

The Structure of the Communications Frame


Query and Response Frame
DA

SA

FC

Length

Information

CRC L

Length of the
information field (byte)
1-255:1-255 byte
0:256 byte

CRC H

CRC-16 code
(2 byte)

Function Code
Sender ID Number
Receiver ID Number

The frame is sent from the source address (SA) by the sender to the destination address (DA), the
receiving device. For the query (Q) and the response request (RR), the SA is the address of the
peripheral device, and the DA is the address of the PLC to which the message is being sent. For the
query answer (QA) and the response (R), the PLC becomes the sender of the message, and so the PLC
address is the SA and the peripheral devices address is the DA.
Query Acknowledge Frame
DA

SA

$80

01

00

CRC L

CRC H

01

00

CRC L

CRC H

01

Error

CRC L

CRC H

Constant

Response Request Frame


DA

SA

$00

Constant

Response Frame for an Error


DA

SA

$8X

Error #1 Wrong communication


function code
Error #2 Out of range
Error #3 Wrong frame structure
Error #4 CPU did not perform
Error #5 Frame too long

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

Read Bits
The following can be read:

Bits stored in the absolute address (R, L, M, K, or F).

N consecutive bit contents (On/Off).

Query (Q) frame


DA

SA

$01

$03

Base

CRC

Number of bits to be read

Length of
information (bit)

Absolute bit address


(address of first bit to read)
For example:
K12.12 (address K12s 12th bit)
Absolute bit address = $14CC

Function Code
Peripheral Device
ID (PC ID)
PLC ID (CPU ID)

Response (R) Frame

DA

SA

$81

Base+0
Base+1
Bit value Bit value

Base+N-1
Bit value

CRC
L

Bits that are On are represented by the


one byte value $FF. Bits that are Off have
a value of $00.
Length of information (number of bytes)
from the length to the next CRC.
Response code ($80 added to the
original function code).
PLC ID (CPU ID)
Peripheral Device ID (PC ID)

For the response, the PLC is the sender


and the PC the receiver, so the DA and SA
are reversed from the Q message.

161

162

D50 PLC User's Manual

Write Bits
Writing bits allows you to:

Modify the contents of the bits stored in the absolute address (R, L, M, K, or F).

Change the bit state between On/Off.

Change multiple consecutive bytes.

Query (Q) Frame

DA

SA

$02

Base
Base+0
Base+1
BASE
BASE
+0 BASE
+1
L
H
Bit value Bit value

Base+N-3
BASE+N-3
Bit value

CRC
CRC
L
H

To turn On the desired bit value from the base,


enter $FF. To change to Off, enter $00.
Absolute bit address (starting address)

Response (R) Frame

DA

SA

$82

$01
Fixed

$00

CRC

Completion Code

163

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

Read Words

Read the content of the words (R, L, M, K, F, or W) assigned to the absolute address.

Read n consecutive words.

Query (Q) Frame

DA

SA

$03

$03

Base

CRC

Number of words
to be read.
Word absolute address
(starting address)
For example: K27
Word absolute address = $014C
Base L = $4C, H = $01

Response (R) Frame


Base + 0
DA

SA

$83

Base + word value


L

Base + N word values

N word values from the base


words requested by the Q.
Length L = N2

CRC
L

164

D50 PLC User's Manual

Write Words

Changes the content of the words assigned to the absolute address (R, L, M, K, F, or W).

Can change n consecutive word contents.

Query (Q) Frame


Base
DA

SA

$04

Base+0 word values


L
H

Base+N word values


L
H

N word values from the base


words requested by the Q
Length L = N2+2

Response (R) Frame


DA

SA

$84

$01
Fixed

$00

CRC

CRC
L

165

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

Read Bits and Words

Reads the bits and/or word contents of the specified absolute addresses.

Can read bits and words regardless of their order and location in memory.

Query (Q) Frame


AO
DA

SA

$05

A1
H

Methods of assigning bit/word abs. address


15 14 13
0
Absolute Address
0 0
Bit Address
0 1
Word Address
1 x
Not Used
Ax = A0, A1,, An
Dx = D0, D1,, Dn

AN
H

CRC
H

Assigning absolute address for bits


Abs. address for the K12 12th bit = $14CC
Ax = 0001 0100 1100 1100
Ax L = $CC, H = $14
Assigning absolute address for word
Abs. address for the K12 word = $014C
Ax = 0100 0001 0100 1100
Ax L = $4C, H = $41

Response (R) Frame


D1
DA

SA

$85

Lx

The size and location of the


returned data depends on the
combination of bit/word
addresses requested. The Lx
parameter should be checked to
verify data size.

DO

Dn
H

CRC
H

For the A0, A1,, An requested by the Q, the content D0, D1,, Dn of
the word/bit is returned.
If Ax denotes a bit address, the Dx data is 1 byte (On = $FF, Off = $00),
and if Ax denotes a word address, the Dx data is 1 word (2 bytes).

166

D50 PLC User's Manual

Write Bits and Words

Changes the content of the bits or words at the specified absolute addresses.

Words and bits may be modified regardless of their order and location in memory.

Query (Q) Frame

A0
DA

SA

$06

When structuring the


outgoing frame, be aware
that the Dx of the Q
changes according to the
bit/word Ax type, and the L
(information length)
changes as well. The Dx
will be either 1 or 2 bytes.

A1
H

D0

D0

SA

CRC
H

Methods of assigning bit/word absolute address


Assigning abs. address for bits
15 14 13
0 Ax = 0001 0100 1100 1100
Absolute Address
Ax L = $CC, H = $14
Assigning abs. address for word
0
0 Bit Address
Abs. address for the K12 word = $014C
0
1 Word Address
Ax = 0100 0001 0100 1100
1
x Not Used
Ax L = $4C, H = $41
If Ax denotes a bit address, the Dx data is 1 byte (On = $FF, Off = $00),
and if Ax denotes a word address, the Dx data is 1 word (2 bytes).

Response (R) Frame

DA

$86

$01
Fixed

$00

CRC

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

167

Communication Program Example


The following program is an example program written in C code to demonstrate the D50 PLC open
communications protocol. This program consists of a header, the main program, and various
subroutines. The buffers and a few variables needed to store the communication data are set as global
variables, so that the main function and the various functions may have access. Notes are provided
alongside the main program to help explain the exact purpose and function of the individual parts of
the program. This particular program was written for the Cutler-Hammer D320 PLC, and so uses
register addresses beyond the D50 limits. For use with a D50, adjust the register addresses used in this
program (M000 to M127 and K000 to K127) to within the D50 range.
Note: This program is provided for illustrative purposes only. It is left to the responsibility of the
user/programmer to ensure that any programs written based on, and using the information
contained in this program, satisfy the requirements of their particular application.
Program
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <dos.h>
#include <conio.h>
#define PC_ID 0xE2
#define Time_limit 28
#define retrial_limit 2
#define TRUE 1
#define FALSE 0
#define lower_byte(x) (unsigned int) ((x)& 0x00FF)
#define upper_byte(x) (unsigned int) (((x)& 0xFF00)>>8)
typedef int BOOL;
unsigned int PORTADD,DIVISOR,sending_delay, receiving_delay;
unsigned int sending_frame[262],receiving_frame[262];
unsigned int Crc;
unsigned int card,i,ix,iy,smode;
unsigned int port_number;
unsigned int PlcID,OldID;
BOOL Success;
unsigned int data,JobID,retrialC;
unsigned int Old,New,receiving_Index_max,sending_Index_max,index,watchdog;
unsigned int M[128],K[128]; /* Example Register */

void RR_occurring(void);
void Trsport(unsigned int);
unsigned int Recport(void);
BOOL sending_occurring(void);
BOOL receiving_occurring(void);
void Crc16(unsigned int);
void Job(void);
unsigned int communication(void);
void Mword_reading(void);
void Kword_writing(void);

Notes
This program was written in Borland
C++. It uses the peripheral device
(PC) to read the M000 to M127
words, and stores them in the K000 to
K127, and then compares the two
registry values and indicates the
results on the screen using the OK or
the FAIL notation. The user may read
or manipulate the various
communication function codes and
the information sent to control the
PLC in various ways.
This program consists of a header, the
main program and various functions.
The buffers and variables needed to
store the communication data are set
as global variables, so that the main
and various other functions may
reference them.
By using the COM1 and COM2 ports
of the computer, serial
communication is possible. By using
the GPU-300 card, parallel
communication is also enabled
(NOTE: The GPU-300 card is not
currently offered by Cutler-Hammer).
The Qs, QAs, RRs, Rs are handled in
the job functions. If there are
communication errors or a frame
breakdown, retry 3 times, then issue a
communication error.
The procedure of the communication,
according to the JobID is:
1. Q sending
2. QA receiving
3. RR sending
4. R receiving
When an error occurs in a frame, a
retransmission should be made.
Major operations of the program

168

D50 PLC User's Manual

1. Adjusts the initial communication


port and the board rate for
communication. Then initializes the
variables.
2. Using the communication function
codes, reads the data of the M field,
reads the word values of the M0 to
M127 area and stores them in the K0
to K127 word area. The K registers
are the retentive registers.
3. Uses the communication code to
read the data of the K area.
4. Compares the values of the M area
and the values of the K area, and
indicates OK when the values are the
same.
void main(void)
{
unsigned int i;
/* Selection of communication port */
clrscr();
printf("PORT : COM1[1]/ COM[2]/ GPC-232[3]/GPC-485[4]/ GPC-Parallel[5] = ");
scanf("%d",&port_number);
if ((port_number < 1) || (port_number > 5)) port_number=5;
/* Selection of Baudrate for Serial communication */
sending_delay=10;
if (port_number != 5)
{
printf("GPC BAUD-RATE : 9600[1]/ 4800[2]/ 2400[3] = ");
scanf("%d",&i);
if ((i < 1) || (i > 3)) i=1;
if (i == 3) i=4;
if ((port_number == 1) || (port_number == 2)) DIVISOR=12 * i;
else DIVISOR=40 * i;
receiving_delay=3 * i + 1;
}
/* Initialization of GPC card */
if(port_number == 1) PORTADD=0x3F0;
if(port_number == 2) PORTADD=0x2F0;
if ((port_number >= 3) && (port_number <=5))
{
PORTADD=0x300;
outportb(0x303,0xC0);/* Mode=2 of 8255 */
outportb(0x303,0x05);/* PC2=1 of 8255 :Disable IRQ2 */
outportb(0x301,0xFF);/* PB0=1 of 8255 :sending Enable RS-485*/
outportb(0x303,0x01);/* PC0=1 of 8255 :Serial Input Enable*/
if(port_number == 3) outportb(0x303,0x02);/* PC1=0 of 8255 :Select RS-232 */
if(port_number == 4) outportb(0x303,0x03);/* PC1=1 of 8255 :Select RS-485 */
if(port_number == 5) outportb(0x303,0x00);/* PC0=0 of 8255 :Disable SerialInput*/
}
else outportb(PORTADD+0x09,(inportb(PORTADD+0x09)&0xF0));/*Disable
Interrupt*/
/* Initialization of USART-Chip : 8250 */
if (port_number != 5)
{
outportb(PORTADD+0x0B,0x80);/* Set of DLAB=1 */
outportb(PORTADD+0x09,0x00);/* Set of High Byte DIVISOR */
outportb(PORTADD+0x08,DIVISOR);/* Set of Low Byte DIVISOR */
outportb(PORTADD+0x0B,0x03); /* parity=None/Stop=1/ Length=8 */
}
/* Processing communication of Read & Write */
for( ; ; )
{

Beginning of the main program


Select the port of the peripheral
device for the communication:
Serial 9 PIN, 25PIN
Parallel GPU-300 parallel
port
Select board rate:
9600 bps (max)
4800 bps
2400 bps
Set the communication environment
(delay time) for the selected ports.

GPC-300 card Setting (8255chip


setting):
Uses the communication card that is
connected, and sets the environment
according to the PLC communication
spec., so that communication is
possible. Not currently offered by
Cutler Hammer.

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

printf("----------------\nPLC-ID (CPU ID) :");


scanf("%d",&PlcID);
if(PlcID<256)
{
Mword_reading();
Kword_writing();
}
else
exit(0);
}
}
void RR_occurring(void)
{
receiving_frame[2]=0;
receiving_frame[3]=1;
receiving_frame[4]=0;
}
void Trsport(unsigned int data)
{
if (port_number == 5) outportb(PORTADD,data);
else outportb(PORTADD+0x08,data);
}
unsigned int Recport(void)
{
unsigned int dt;
if (port_number == 5) dt=inportb(PORTADD);
else dt=inportb(PORTADD+0x08);
return(dt);
}
BOOL sending_occurring(void)
{
BOOL tf;
if (port_number == 5) tf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x02) & 0x80)==0x80);
else tf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x0D) & 0x20)==0x20);
return(tf);
}
BOOL receiving_occurring(void)
{
BOOL rf;
if (port_number == 5) rf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x02) & 0x20)==0x20);
else rf=((inportb(PORTADD+0x0D) & 0x01)==0x01);
return(rf);
}
void Crc16(unsigned int data)
{
unsigned int i;
Crc=Crc^(data & 0x00FF);
for(i=0;i<=7;i++)
{
if((Crc & 0x0001) == 0x0001) Crc=(Crc>>1)^0xA001; /* 0x0001 : mult-nominal
expression */
else Crc=Crc>>1;
}
}

CPU-ID: Input PLC ID (0 to 255)

void Job(void)
{
/* JobID=0
/* JobID=1
/* JobID=2
/* JobID=3
/* JobID=4
/* JobID=5
/* JobID=6

Communication sequence
functions:
: Change to sending-Mode for Serial port */
: Transmit sending-Frame
*/
: Change to receiving-Mode for Serial port */
: Address Polling of ACK from CPU */
: Receive ACK from CPU
*/
: Change to sending-Mode for Serial port */
: Transmit RR-Frame
*/

169

Read the register value for the M area


(M0 to M127)
Store the value for the M area in the
K area (K0 to K127)

RR (Request Response) request


function.

Sends data to the communication


port.

Reads the received data from the


communication port.

Outputs the data when a send event


occurs.

Inputs the data when a Receive event


occurs.

CRC Calculation:
Encodes the communication data in
the byte stream. When one
communication function is complete,
it is attached to the most recent frame,
or is compared with the attached CRC
to check for data errors.

Job ID=0~4 Q,QA Frame handling


Job ID=5~9 RA,R Frame handling

170

D50 PLC User's Manual

/* JobID=7 : Change to receiving-Mode for Serial port */


/* JobID=8 : Address Polling of RES from CPU */
/* JobID=9 : Receive RES from CPU
*/
/* JobID=10 : Success communication Processing */
switch(JobID)
{
case 0: case 5:if (port_number != 5)
{
if (port_number == 4) outportb(0x301,0xFF);
else outportb(PORTADD+0x0C,(inportb(PORTADD+0x0C) | 0x02));
delay(sending_delay);
}
if (JobID == 5) RR_occurring();
watchdog=0; index=0; sending_Index_max=5; Crc=0xFFFF; JobID++;
break;
case 1: case 6:if (receiving_occurring()) data=Recport();
if (sending_occurring())
{
if (index<sending_Index_max-1)
{
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]);
Crc16(receiving_frame[index]);
if (index==3)
{
if (receiving_frame[3]==0) sending_Index_max=256+5;
else sending_Index_max=receiving_frame[3]+5;
}
}
else if (index==sending_Index_max-1)
{
receiving_frame[index]=lower_byte(Crc);
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]);
}
else if (index==sending_Index_max)
{
receiving_frame[index]=upper_byte(Crc);
Trsport(receiving_frame[index]); watchdog=0; JobID++;
}; index++;
}
break;
case 2: case 7:if (port_number != 5)
{
delay(receiving_delay);
if (port_number ==4) outportb(0x301,0x00);
else outportb(PORTADD+0x0C,(inportb(PORTADD+0x0C) & 0xFD));
}
JobID++;
break;
case 3:
case 8:if (receiving_occurring())
{
data=Recport();
if(data==PC_ID)
{
Crc=0xFFFF; index=1; receiving_Index_max=5;
receiving_frame[0]=data; Crc16(data); JobID++;
}
}
break;
case 4:
case 9:if(receiving_occurring())
{
if(index<receiving_Index_max-1)
{
receiving_frame[index]=Recport();
Crc16(receiving_frame[index]);

JobID 0,5:
A frame sends the data from the
peripheral device to the PLC. It resets
the watchdog and the CRC.
Use a delay after the send to avoid
errors due to communications delays.

JobID 1,6:
Sends the Q and RR data.
When there are no errors, it resets the
watchdog and proceeds on to the next
sequence.

JobID=2,7:
A sequence that senses the sending of
the QA and R data to the peripheral
device after the completion of the
functions that are received by the
PLC from the previous frame.
JobID=3,8:
Handles the received data, and
calculates the CRC of the received
data.

JobID=4,9:
Stores the received data in the
internal receivable buffer and
compares the CRC value sent by the
PLC to the calculated CRC value. It
notifies the system that a successful
communication is made when the two

Appendix A: D50 PLC Communication Protocol

171

if(index==3)
{
if(receiving_frame[3]==0) receiving_Index_max=256+5;
else receiving_Index_max=receiving_frame[3]+5;
}
}
else if(index==receiving_Index_max-1)
{
receiving_frame[index]=Recport();
if(receiving_frame[index]!=lower_byte(Crc)) JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}
else if(index==receiving_Index_max)
{
receiving_frame[index]=Recport();
if(receiving_frame[index]==upper_byte(Crc)) JobID++;
else JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}; index++;
}
break;
case 10:Success=TRUE;
}
}

values match, and proceeds on to the


next sequence.

unsigned int communication(void)


{
struct time t;
unsigned far *tm;
int ret;
Success=FALSE;
receiving_frame[0]=PlcID;receiving_frame[1]=PC_ID; retrialC=retrial_limit;
watchdog=0; JobID=0; index=0; sending_Index_max=5; Crc=0xFFFF;
do
{
tm=(unsigned far *) 0x046C;
New=*tm;
Job();
if(watchdog>Time_limit)
{
watchdog=0; retrialC--;
JobID=(JobID & 0x05);
}
if(!(((Old^New) & 0x02)==0))
{
watchdog=watchdog+1;
Old=New;
}
}while((retrialC!=0) && (Success==FALSE));
if(retrialC==0) ret=1;
else ret=0;
return(ret);
}
void Mword_reading(void)
{
/* Example of Read-Register */
int i;
receiving_frame[2]=3;/* EXAMPLE READ WORD(M000-M0127) */
receiving_frame[3]=3;/* Number Of Byte For Information = 3 */
receiving_frame[4]=0xC0;/* BASE(M000=$00c0) */
receiving_frame[5]=0;/* BASE HIGH */
receiving_frame[6]=128;/* Number Of Byte M000-M127 */
if(communication() == 0)
{
printf("READ M0000-M0127 OK - ");
for(i=0;i<=127;i++) M[i]=receiving_frame[i*2+4] +receiving_frame[i*2 +5]*256;
}

If the frames that were sent have no


response within 3 seconds, assumes it
failed communication, and retransfers
the data.
The time from the sending and
receiving is counted using the
watchdog timer. Reset the watchdog
timer when a retransfer is being
made. No response after 3
retransmissions indicates a
communication error. (Normal return
value = 0, Abnormal return value = 1)

JobID=10:
Receiving

Reading Function of the register M.


Uses the communication function
code number 3 (reading N
consecutive words) to read the M
area.
Note:
Sending frame[4] = The lower byte of
the abs. address of the words to be
read.
Sending frame[5] = The upper byte of
the abs. address of the word to be
read.
Abs. address of the M0 = 0x0C0

172

D50 PLC User's Manual

else printf("communication error\n");


}

void Kword_writing(void)
{
/* Example of Write-Register */
int i;
receiving_frame[2]=4;
/* EXAMPLE write WORD(K000-K063) */
receiving_frame[3]=130;
/* Number Of Byte For Information */
receiving_frame[4]=0x40;
/* BASE(K000=$0140) LOW */
receiving_frame[5]=1;
/* BASE HIGH */
for(i=0;i<=63;i++)
{
receiving_frame[i*2 +6]= lower_byte(K[i]);
receiving_frame[i*2 +7]= upper_byte(K[i]);
}
if(communication() == 0) printf("WRITE K0000-K0063 OK\n");
else printf("communication error\n");
receiving_frame[2]=4;
/* EXAMPLE write WORD(K064-K0127) */
receiving_frame[3]=130;
/* Number Of Byte For Information */
receiving_frame[4]=0x80;
/* BASE(K000=$0180) LOW */
receiving_frame[5]=1;
/* BASE HIGH */
for(i=0;i<=63;i++)
{
receiving_frame[i*2 +6]= lower_byte(K[i+64]);
receiving_frame[i*2 +7]= upper_byte(K[i+64]);
}
if(communication() == 0) printf("WRITE K0064-K0127 OK\n");
else printf("communication error\n");
}

Note:
Sending frame[6] = The number of
words to be read.
Sends a function code requesting to
read the M area, and stores the
received data in the buffer.
Writing Function of the K Register.
Uses the communication function
code 4 (writing N consecutive words)
to store the specified value in the
K000 to K063 word.
Note:
Abs. address of K0 = 0x0140

Writing Function of the K Register.


Uses the communication function
code 4 (writing N consecutive words)
to store the specified value in the
K064 to K127 word.
Note:
Abs. address of K64 = 0x0180

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

173

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

The D50 PLC provides several special functions through the I/O built into the D50 controller. This
appendix details the configuration and operation of the integrated special I/O functions, including the
high-speed counters, pulse output, pulse catch input, and selectable input response delay.

174

D50 PLC User's Manual

Overview
The D50 PLC provides several additional functions through the integrated I/O on the base unit. These
special I/O functions expand the capabilities of the D50 PLC to allow for use in a variety of specialized
applications. This appendix details those capabilities, and provides instructions on configuration,
application, programming, and operation of the special I/O. Four types of advanced operation are
available, as listed below.
Note: These special functions are only available on the controller units. They are not available
through any of the digital expansion modules, only on the base module.

High Speed Counter


The D50 PLC provides two separate high-speed counter inputs. Each counter accepts 2 phase inputs to
allow for up, down, up/down, quadrature, and ring count modes. The counters provide a 24-bit count
for signals up to 10kHz (5kHz in 2-phase mode).

Configurable Input Response Delay


The eight inputs on the base unit can be configured to delay their response to an input signal. By
programming a delay time on a digital input, input signals can be de-bounced to prevent false or
multiple input signals where not desired.

Pulse Catch Input


In certain applications it is necessary to be able to detect a very high-speed, short duration pulse input.
The Pulse Catch input will latch On for at least one scan any input signal of 150sec or more.

Pulse Output
The D50 also provides one configurable output supporting two modes of pulse operation. The first
mode allows the user to send out a configurable number of pulses, at a desired frequency (Pulse
Mode). The second mode allows the user to set the output to continuous pulses at a given frequency,
with a configurable duty cycle (PWM Mode).

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

175

Special I/O Function Registers


To handle the requirements of configuration and operation of the special function I/O, the D50
provides 21 special I/O function registers. These registers are assigned to the various functions, and
are programmed and edited by the user in the D50 PLC ladder program. The purpose of each
individual register is outlined below.
Special I/O Function Registers
Special I/O Function

Description

Register
Address

Register
Name

R004

H0MODE

Configuration register

R005

H0STRL

Low word of the 24-bit start value

R006

H0STRH

High-speed Counter
Channel 0

High word of the 24-bit start value

R007

H0ENDL

R008

H0ENDH

R009

H0PVL

Low word of the 24-bit present value

R010

H0PVH

High word of the 24-bit present value

R011

PMODE

Configuration register

R012

PFREQ

R013

PSV

Pulse Output

Low word of the 24-bit end value


High word of the 24-bit end value

Pulse frequency (20Hz to 5kHz)


Pulse start value/PWM Duty cycle

R014

PPV

R019

H1MODE

Configuration register

Pulse present value

R020

H1STRL

Low word of the 24-bit start value

R021

H1STRH

High-speed Counter
Channel 1

High word of the 24-bit start value

R022

H1ENDL

R023

H1ENDH

Low word of the 24-bit end value

R024

H1PVL

R025

H1PVH

R026

HFLAG

High-speed Counter

R027

FTIME

Input Delay

Delay time for digital inputs

R028

PCATCH

Pulse Catch

Configuration register for pulse catch inputs

High word of the 24-bit end value


Low word of the 24-bit present value
High word of the 24-bit present value
Comparison flags for both HSC channels

176

D50 PLC User's Manual

High Speed Counter


The D50 PLC provides two 24-bit, 10kHz high-speed counters (on the DC-input units only). Each of
the two counters functions identically to the other. Each has a set of 7 registers allocated for its
configuration and operation, plus an additional comparision register that they share. High-speed
counter channel 0 uses registers R4 to R10, while channel 1 uses register R19 to R25. Register R26 is
a shared comparison register that is used by both channels. The purpose of each register is described
in greater detail below.

Register Descriptions
MODE (R004, R019)
The mode register is used to turn on the high-speed counter, configure which mode it will be operating
in, and enable or disable the inputs used by the counter. Each bit in the low byte of the MODE register
is used to turn On or Off a feature of the high-speed counter channel.

STR (R005/6, R020/21)


The STR registers are a pair of registers that the user places the START value for the counter channel
into. When the register is configured for Ring Count Mode, or when the counter is reset using the
Preset bit or the Preset input, the START value is loaded into the present value of the counter. Since
the counter is a 24-bit value, two registers are required the first holds the low 16 bits of the value,
and the second holds the high 8 bits.

END (R007/8, R022/23)


The END registers are a pair of registers that hold the Set Value for the high-speed counter. When the
present value is counting, bits are set in the comparison register that indicate when the counter is
below, at, or above the END value (see FLAG below). The END value is also a 24-bit value requiring
two registers, and is set by the user.

PV (R009/10, R024/25)
The PV registers are a pair of registers that hold the Present Value for the high-speed counter. The PV
registers hold the actual counting value of the inputs coming into the PLC. Like STR and END, PV is
a 24-bit value.

FLAG (R026)
The FLAG register provides comparison bits between the high-speed counter Present Values (PV) and
End Values (END). Each counter channel has three bits in the FLAG register that indicate whether the
PV is greater than (>), less than (<), or equal to (=) the END value. Since the equal to comparison is a
latched bit, a fourth bit is provided to reset the = bit.

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

177

Bit Registers
Three of the configuration registers used by the high-speed counters are bit registers each bit in the
register serves a different purpose. The three bit registers and the individual bit meanings are
described in further detail below.
H0MODE Mode Register R004
Bit #:
Bit Name:

RUN

UD/2

RING

PRST

R2

R1

R0

Description
Enable R0.0 as Up/Ph. A count input
Enable R0.1 as Down/Ph. B count input
Enable R0.2 as Preset input
Not Used
Preset Counter (STR  PV)
Enable Ring Counter mode
Enable Up/Down or 2-phase mode
Run/Stop Turn on Counter

H1MODE Mode Register R019


Bit #:
Bit Name:

RUN

UD/2

RING

PRST

R6

R5

R4

Description
Enable R0.4 as Up/Ph. A count input
Enable R0.5 as Down/Ph. B count input
Enable R0.6 as Preset input
Not Used
Preset Counter (STR  PV)
Enable Ring Counter mode
Enable Up/Down or 2-phase mode
Run/Stop Turn on Counter

HFLAG Comparison Register R026


Bit #:
Bit Name:

EQ1D

GT1

LT1

EQ1

EQ0D

GT0

LT0

EQ0

Description
PV = END on channel 0 (latched)
PV < END on channel 0
PV > END on channel 0
Unlatch EQ0 bit (PV = END)
PV = END on channel 1 (latched)
PV < END on channel 1
PV > END on channel 1
Unlatch EQ1 bit (PV = END)

178

D50 PLC User's Manual

Programming Procedure
The high-speed counter is very easy to use, and requires very little programming. The following steps
outline the standard programming procedure to set up, turn on, and use the D50 high speed counter.
1.

Configure the type of counter to be used by turning on the necessary mode bits in the MODE
register. To set the counter up for 2-phase or Up/Down mode, set bit 6 (UD/2). To configure
the counter as a ring counter, set bit 5 (RING). If the counter uses only a single input, and is
not a ring counter, leave both bits off.

2.

Enable the inputs required by the counter to count. On channel 0, set bit 0 (R0) of its MODE
register R4 if the input on R0.0 will be a count input. Likewise set bit 1 (R1) if the input on
R0.1 will be a count input (for example, for a down-counter or 2-phase counter). On channel
1, set bit 0 (R4) and bit 1 (R5) of its MODE register R19 based on which inputs, R0.4 and
R0.5, will be used as count inputs. The Preset bits PRST are should be set if an external input
will be used to reset the counter value.

3.

Set the start value STR and the end value END for the counter, based on the application. The
STR value will be used to reset the counter, while the END value is used by the comparison
register HFLAG.

4.

Turn on the counter channel. This is done simply by setting the RUN bit, bit 7, of the MODE
register for that channel.

5.

Use either the comparison register (HFLAG) or the D50 PLCs comparison instructions (>, <,
=, >=, <=, <>) on the present value (PV) of the counter in the program, based on the
application.

The following ladder program illustrates the above 5-step procedure for a simple counter application.
For this example, a standard Up Counter is programmed, with an end value of 100. At the count of
9000, the program turns on the D50 PLCs first output R15.0, and at the count of 10000, the second
PLC output R15.1 is turned on. Since this is an Up Counter, the first input of channel 0 is used to
count input pulses.
F1.0

F1.0

F1.0

R4.6
(RST)

Turn OFF 2-phase mode

R4.5
(RST)

Turn OFF Ring Count mode

R4.0
(SET)

Turn ON Up input 0 (R0.0) for up count

R4.1
(RST)

Turn OFF Down input 1 (R0.1)

R4.2
(RST)

Turn OFF Preset input 2 (R0.2)

DLET
D = R5
S=0

Set the Start Value (STR) to 0

DLET

D = R7
S = 10000
F1.0

D>

D = R9
S = 9000
R26.0

Set the End Value (END) to 10000

R4.7
(SET)

Turn ON the high-speed counter

R15.0
(OUT)

Turn ON R15.0 at 9000 counts

R15.1
(OUT)

Turn ON R15.1 when PV = END

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

179

Configurable Input Response Delay


The special I/O function register FTIME (R27) controls the amount of time that an input must remain
on before the input state is changed in the PLC I/O map. This amount of time is called the Input
Response Delay, and affects all eight inputs on the controller module (R0.0 to R0.7). This time is
user-configurable from anywhere from 0 to 64ms in length. This allows the user to avoid false input
signals due to contact bounce, input noise, or false signals of short duration. The delay is applied
equally both to the turn On, and turn Off, of the input signal, as shown in the diagram below.
Note: Any of the eight inputs that are used for either high-speed counter or pulse catch are not
affected by the Input Response Delay setting.
Input Response Delay
0 to 64ms

Input Signal

Modified Input R0.0

The Input Response Delay is automatically set for all the inputs when the new time value is loaded into
the FTIME register, R27. The ladder example below illustrates setting the Input Response Delay time
to a value of 25ms.

F1.0

LET

D = R27
S = 25

Set the Input Response Delay


register (FTIME) to 25ms

180

D50 PLC User's Manual

Pulse Catch Input


In many types of high-speed applications, such as products moving along a conveyor belt, the input
signal to the PLC is of very short duration, often less than the scan time of the PLC. To allow the user
program to detect those types of short-duration input signals, the D50 allows any or all of the digital
inputs on the controller to be configured as Pulse Catch inputs.
When configured as a pulse catch input, any input signal of 150sec or more is latched On for the next
I/O scan. The input remains On for at lease one I/O scan, and turns Off on the next scan after the input
signal has turned off.

I/O
Scan

PLC Scan

I/O
Scan
>150usec

Input Signal

Modified Input R0.0

The PCATCH special I/O function register determines which of the eight inputs on the controller are
configured for pulse catch inputs, and which operate normally. Each bit in the PCATCH register R28
represents one of the eight inputs. If the bit is set On, then the corresponding input on the controller is
configured as a pulse catch input. The logic required to set the PCATCH register R28 is shown below.
In this example, inputs 1, 3, and 7 are set for Pulse Catch Inputs.

LET

F1.0

Set Inputs 1, 3, and 7 as Pulse Catch


Note: 8A hex = 10001010 binary

D = R28
S = $8A

Pulse Catch
Inputs

DC 24V

1
IN

OUT

D50

5
IN

Programmable Controller
RUN

IN

ERR

OUT

RUN
STOP

Cutler-Hammer
IN 100-240V

GND

OUT
C

OUT
0

OUT
3

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

181

Pulse Output
The D50 PLC provides two modes of Pulse Output on the first output contact of the controller. The
first mode, Pulse Mode, sends out a given number of pulses at a user-defined frequency. The second
mode, PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) Mode, sends out a continuous stream of pulses, at a userdefined frequency and duty-cycle. Both modes use the same set of special I/O function registers (R11
to R14). The mode used by the D50 is determined by the configuration of the PMODE register, R11.

Register Descriptions
PMODE (R11)
The mode register is used to turn on the pulse output, configure which mode it will be operating in,
enable the output used, and set up the pulse count. Each bit in the low byte of the PMODE register is
used to turn On or Off a feature of the pulse output, as shown below.
PMODE Mode Register R011
Bit #:
Bit Name:

RUN

FUNC

OUT

PRST

CMP

Description
Pulse Output completed.
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Preset Pulse Counter (PSV  PPV)
Enable Output R15.0 for Pulsing
Mode: Pulse = 0, PWM = 1
Run/Stop Turn on Pulse Output

PFREQ (R012)
The PFREQ register sets the Pulse Frequency, from 20Hz to 5kHz, of the output. Whether in Pulse
Mode, or PWM Mode, the output pulses will be sent at this rate.

182

D50 PLC User's Manual

PSV (R013)
The PSV register is defined by the Mode of operation. In Pulse Mode, the PSV register holds the total
number of Pulses to be sent out, from 0 to 65,535. When set to 0, the pulse output is continuous. In
PWM Mode, the PSV register holds the duty cycle of the pulse, from 0 to 100%.
The Duty Cycle of the pulse is defined as the width of the pulse, from 0 (no pulse) to 100% (constant
On). For example, a 100Hz pulse will generate 100 pulses every second, or 1 pulse every 10ms. If the
duty cycle of the pulse is 75%, the pulse is ON for 75% of that 10ms, or for 7.5ms. It is OFF for the
remaining 25%, or 2.5ms. This is illustrated by the diagram below.

Pulse Frequency: 100Hz


Duty Cycle: 75%

7.5ms

10ms

PPV (R014)
The PPV register holds the Present Value of the Pulse Output when in Pulse Mode. The Present value
counts down from the initial value, set by the PSV register. When the PPV register reaches 0, the
pulses stop. In PWM Mode, the PPV register should always be 0.

Appendix B: Special I/O Functions

183

Pulse Mode Programming Procedure


Programming the pulse output for Pulse Mode is a very simple procedure. The following steps allow
the user to set the pulse output to send out the exact number of pulses required by the application.
1.

Configure the pulse output for Pulse Mode by turning Off bit 6 of the PMODE register R11.

2.

Enable the pulse output R15.0 by turning On bit 5 of the PMODE register R11.

3.

Set the Pulse Frequency PFREQ (R12) for the pulses to be sent out.

4.

Set the initial Pulse Value PSV (R13) for the total number of pulses to be sent out.

5.

Turn on the Pulse Output by turning On bit 7 of the PMODE register R11.

6.

Begin the Pulse Output by turning on the Preset bit (bit 4) of the PMODE register R11. This
will move the total number of pulses into the Present Value register, and begin pulsing the
outputs.

The following ladder program illustrates the above procedure by configuring a Pulse Output on the
D50 PLC. The Pulse Output is set to send out exactly 200 pulses at a frequency of 50Hz, when the
PLC is first placed into RUN.
F1.0

F1.0

R11.6
(RST)

Turn OFF PWM mode

R11.5
(SET)

Turn ON Pulse Output R15.0

DLET

D = R12
S = 50

Set the Frequency (PFREQ) to 50Hz

DLET

D = R13
S = 200

Set the Start Value (PSV) to 200

F1.0

R11.7
(SET)

Turn ON the Pulse Output

F1.0

R11.4
(OUT)

Begin Pulses by setting the PRST bit

184

D50 PLC User's Manual

PWM Mode Programming Procedure


Programming the PWM Mode is similar to the Pulse Mode. Rather than setting an initial value and
triggering the PRST bit, the PWM mode simply requires the user to set the Frequency and Duty cycle.
The following procedure should be followed to properly set and use the PWM Mode.
1.

Configure the pulse output for PWM Mode by turning On bit 6 of the PMODE register R11.

2.

Enable the pulse output R15.0 by turning On bit 5 of the PMODE register R11.

3.

Set the Pulse Frequency PFREQ (R12) for the pulses to be sent out.

4.

Set the Pulse Duty Cycle PSV (R13) for the width of the pulses, from 0 to 100%.

5.

Turn on the Pulse Output by turning On bit 7 of the PMODE register R11.

The following ladder program illustrates the above procedure by configuring a PWM Output on the
D50 PLC. The PWM Output is set to continuously send out pulses at a frequency of 50Hz and a duty
cycle of 25%, when the PLC is first placed into RUN.

F1.0

F1.0

R11.6
(SET)

Turn ON PWM mode

R11.5
(SET)

Turn ON Pulse Output R15.0

DLET

D = R12
S = 50

Set the Frequency (PFREQ) to 50Hz

DLET

D = R13
S = 25
F1.0

R11.7
(SET)

Set the Duty Cycle (PSV) to 25

Turn ON the PWM Output

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

185

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

The D50PGM10 pocket editor provides a simple, convenient method of troubleshooting, monitoring
and editing a D50 PLC on the shop floor. This appendix describes in detail the various functions of
the pocket editor, and how to use them.

186

D320 PLC User's Manual

Overview
This appendix describes in detail the use of the D50PGM10 pocket editor for programming,
monitoring, and troubleshooting the D50 PLC. The Pocket Editor provides mnemonic-only program
loader support for the D50 PLC in a heavy-duty, light-weight industrial package. The various
functions of the pocket editor are presented in a step-by-step procedural guide to simplify the use and
operation of the editor.

Specifications
Operating Specifications
Item

Specification

Supported PLCs
Power Supply
Display

D50
5VDC supplied from connected PLC

Indicator

LEDs and 7-segment display

Capacity

22 LEDs; 5-digit 7-segment display

Keypad

20-key multifunction keypad

Dimensions
PGM-10
AND

OUT

MCS

SHF

OR

TIM

MCR

RUN

STR

CNT

SET

ON

NOT

DIF

RST

SST

K/7

F/8

W/9

FUN

AND

OUT

MCS

DEL

SHF

M/4

AUX

CHK

OR

TIM

MCR

INS

SCH

R/1

ADR

RD

STR

CNT

SET

ENT

PRE

MON

SST

NOT

DIF

RST

3.45in
(88mm)

TC

3.15in
(80mm)

WR

CLR

NXT

1.0in
(25mm)

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

187

Part Descriptions
The pocket editor is comprised of 13 Instruction LEDs, 3 Status LEDs, 6 Register LEDs, a 5-digit
Address/Data LED Display, and 20 keys that operate as instruction keys, number keys, and function
keys. The diagram below points out the individual features of the pocket editor.
Status LEDs

Instruction
LEDs

Register
LEDs

PGM-10
R

AND

OUT

MCS

SHF

OR

TIM

MCR

RUN

STR

CNT

SET

ON

NOT

DIF

RST

SST

Address/Data
LED Display

K/7

F/8

W/9

FUN

AND

OUT

MCS

DEL

SHF

M/4

AUX

CHK

OR

TIM

MCR

INS

SCH

R/1

ADR

RD

STR

CNT

SET

ENT

PRE

MON

SST

NOT

DIF

RST

Instruction/
Number Keys

TC

WR

CLR

NXT

Function
Keys

Instruction LEDs
The instruction LEDs are illuminated to indicate the basic instruction for a given step of the
mnemonic program. When displaying a step in the program, one or more of these LEDs will be lit.

Status LEDs
The three status LEDs on the pocket editor are the SHF, ON, and RUN LEDs in the center.

The SHF LED provides visual feedback that the user has pressed the shift (SHF) key.

The RUN LED indicates when the D50 PLC is in the RUN mode.

The ON LED indicates when a given contact or output point is turned On, when monitoring
and instruction or bit register.

188

D320 PLC User's Manual

Register LEDs
The six register LEDs indicate which address type is being displayed, when displaying a data value or
address. The possible register types are R for external I/O, M for internal contacts, K for internal
retentive (Keep) contacts, F for system flags, W for data words, and TC for timer/counter done
contacts.

Address/Data LED Display


The address/data LED display is a 5-digit 7-segment display capable of showing numerical and
character data. The display is used to show data values, register addresses, and step addresses.

A 5-digit value is displayed to represent either a bit address (where the first three digits are the
word, and the last two are the bit), or a constant value that is a parameter for an instruction.

A 4-digit value represents a word address for a register

Function numbers and timer/counter channel numbers are represented with the first two
characters being Fn and ch, respectively.

When displaying a step address in the mnemonic program, periods appear to the bottom-right
of each digit in the 5-digit address.

Instruction Keys
There are 12 instruction keys on the pocket editor that are used for entering the 25 basic instructions on
the D50 PLC. To enter certain of the basic instructions, more than one of the instruction keys may be
combined. Refer to the Basic Instruction table at the end of this appendix for details.

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

189

Function Keys
There are 8 function keys on the pocket editor, plus two functions that are accessed using the SHF key.
The 10 functions each have multiple uses, based on the mode of operation the pocket editor is being
used in.
Function Key Descriptions
Key

Function Descriptions

DEL

Delete a step of logic. To accept the Delete request, press the ENT key after the DEL key.

INS

Insert a step of logic in front of the current step.


Clear the program.
Change the PLC mode between RUN/STOP.

ENT

Enter a step of logic.


Switch between displaying instruction and step number.
Accept the requested function.

CLR

Cancel key input.


Cancel the current display mode.
Release a forced output.

SHF

Enable the shifted operation of each key.

SCH

Search for an instruction, step address, or register.

PRE

Return to the previously displayed step, or register.

NXT

Advance to the next step or register.

190

D320 PLC User's Manual

Operating Procedures
There are seven separate types of operations that the D50PGM10 pocket editor can perform. These
seven operations provide all of the functionality required to program, edit, monitor, and configure the
D50 PLC. The seven operations are as follows:

Clear Program Deletes the entire program memory from the D50 PLC.

Add Instruction Allows the user to write a new program step by step.

Monitor Program View the D50 mnemonic program, one instruction at a time.

Edit Program Performs inserting, deleting, and changing of program instructions.

Error Checking Check the syntax of the program for errors.

Monitor I/O Allows the user to monitor and force register values.

Run/Stop PLC Switches the PLC between the RUN and STOP modes.

Key Operation Summary


Function
Clear Program

Key Operation
INS DEL ENT

STOP

Basic

[Op-code key] [Register Type] [Register No.]

Timer/Counter

OUT [Op-code key] [Channel No.] [Set Value]


SHF FUN [Function No.] ENT

Add Instruction
Application

Mode

[Operand 1] ENT

STOP

[Operand 2] ENT
[Operand 3] ENT

Monitor Program

Edit Program

Sequential

NXT or PRE

Search by Step

SHF 0 [Step No.] SCH

Search by Inst.

[Enter Instruction] SCH

Search by Reg.

SHF [Register Type] [Register No.] SCH

Insert Inst.

[Enter Instruction] INS

Delete Inst.

DEL ENT

Change Inst.

[Enter Instruction] ENT

Error Checking

Monitor I/O
Force I/O

Run/Stop PLC

STOP

SHF CHK
Register Value

RUN/STOP

RUN/STOP

SHF [Register Type] [Register No.] MON


Change:

0 [Register Value] ENT

Next:

NXT

Previous:

PRE

Force On:

SET ENT

Force Off:

RST ENT

Clear Force:

CLR

RUN

PLC RUN

INS SET

STOP

PLC STOP

INS RST

RUN

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

191

Clear Program
The Clear Program function will clear out the program memory from the D50 PLC. All of the register
memory will also be cleared, with the exception of the Keep (K) registers, and the Timer/Counter
registers.

Function: Clear the program in the D50 PLC

PLC Mode: STOP

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

5-Digit Display

Remarks

INS

AUX

Switches to Auxiliary Mode

DEL

ALL d

Confirm delete all?

ENT

End

Complete delete all

Note: To cancel the clear after pressing the DEL key, press the CLR key.

192

D320 PLC User's Manual

Add Instruction
The Add Instruction procedure allows the user to enter new mnemonic programs, one instruction at a
time. In the example below, the small rung of ladder shown is entered one step at a time, as described
in the Operating Procedure table.

Function: Add new program instructions to the D50 PLC

PLC Mode: STOP

Ladder Program
R0.1

R0.2

R15.3
(OUT)

R15.3

Mnemonic Program
STR
OR
ANN
OUT

R0.1
R15.3
R0.2
R15.3

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

INS DEL ENT

5-Digit Display

Remarks

End

Clears program

STR R 1 INS

STR R

STR

R0.1

OR R 1 5 0 3 INS

OR R

1503

OR

R15.3

AND NOT R 2 INS

AND NOT R

ANN

R0.2

OUT R 1 5 0 3 INS

OUT R

1503

OUT

R15.3

End

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

193

Monitor Program
The Monitor Program procedure allows the user to view the currently running program in the D50
PLC. There are two ways to select the portion of the program to monitor, either by consecutively
selecting the next or previous step, or by searching for a particular step.

Sequential Step Monitor


Using the next step (NXT) and previous step (PRE) keys, each step of the program is displayed in
consecutive order, as is the state of the bit contact for that step, when applicable. The actual step
number of the instruction can be viewed by pressing the ENT key. In the example below, the small
rung of ladder shown is monitored one step at a time, using the NXT key as described in the Operating
Procedure table.

Function: Step forward (and back) through the program instructions in the D50 PLC

PLC Mode: STOP or RUN

Ladder Program
R0.1

K15.2
(OUT)

K15.2

K15.2

R16.3

D = M15
S1 = R15
S2 = K3

Mnemonic Program
R0.1
K15.2
K15.2
K15.2
R16.3
30
30
TC30
M15
R15

Ch = 30
SV = 30

MUL

K15.2

STR
OR
OUT
STR
ANN
TIM
STR
MUL

TIM

K3

194

D320 PLC User's Manual

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

5-Digit Display

Remarks

NXT

STR R

LED

00001

STR

R0.1

NXT

OR K

01502

OR

K15.2

NXT

OUT K

01502

OUT

K15.2

NXT

STR K

01502

STR

K15.2

ENT

0.0.0.0.3.

Displays the step number

NXT

0.0.0.0.4.

Moves to the next step

ENT

AND NOT R

01603

ANN

R15.3

NXT

OUT TIM

Ch030

TIM

30

30

00030

TIM

30

30

NXT
NXT

STR TC

NXT

030

STR

TC30

Fn039

MUL

M15

R15

K3

NXT

00015

MUL

M15

R15

K3

NXT

00015

MUL

M15

R15

K3

00003

MUL

M15

R15

K3

NXT

End

Note: By pressing the PRE key at any time, the previous instruction will be displayed.

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

195

Search Step Monitor


The Search key (SCH) can also be used to monitor the program, by searching for either the exact step
number, or a contact or register within the step. In the example below, the small rung of ladder shown
is monitored by searching for various steps in the program.

Function: Search for a specific step in the D50 PLC

PLC Mode: STOP or RUN

Ladder Program
LET

R0.0

M0.5

D = K0
S=0
R0.0
R

INC

D = K0

DEC

D = K0

==

R15.1
(OUT)

A = K15.4
B = 20
R0.0

M8.15

M0.1

M8.15

Mnemonic Program
STR
LET
STR
AND
INC
DEC
STR==
OUT
STR
AND
OUT
STN
AND
LET

R0.0
K0
M0.5
DIF
K0
K0
K15.4
R15.1
R0.0
M8.15
R15.2
M0.1
M8.15
K1

0
R0.0
R15.1

R15.2
(OUT)

LET

D = K1
S=2

196

D320 PLC User's Manual

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

SHF 0 9 9 9 SCH

5-Digit Display

Remarks

End

Searches to End of program

00000

Search for first step (step 0)

SHF 0 0 SCH

STR R

SHF 0 3 SCH

AND DIF R

00000

Search for step 3

AND M 8 1 5 SCH

AND M

00815

Search for instruction

SCH

AND M

00815

Continue search

SHF 0 8 SCH

STR R

00000

Search for step 8

NXT

AND M

00815

PRE

STR R

00000

PRE

OUT R

01501

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

197

Edit Program
The D50PGM10 pocket editor provides the user the ability to insert, delete, or change an instruction in
the D50 PLC. Each of the three procedures is illustrated on the following pages.

Insert Instruction
In the example below, one contact is inserted in the rung of ladder, as shown.

Function: Insert a new step into the D50 PLC program

PLC Mode: STOP

Ladder Program
R0.1

R15.3
(OUT)

R15.3

R0.1

M1.8

R15.3
(OUT)

R15.3

Mnemonic Program
STR
OR
OUT

R0.1
R15.3
R15.3

STR
OR
AND
OUT

R0.1
R15.3
M1.8
R15.3

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

5-Digit Display

Remarks

OUT R 1 5 0 3 SCH

OUT R

01503

Search for instruction to add after

AND M 1 0 8 INS

AND M

108

Insert the new instruction

OUT R

01503

Next instruction will be displayed

AND M

00108

Verify instruction was added

PRE

198

D320 PLC User's Manual

Delete Instruction
In the example below, one contact is deleted from the rung of ladder, as shown.

Function: Delete an existing step out of the D50 PLC program

PLC Mode: STOP

Ladder Program
R0.1

M0.5

K15.4
(OUT)

K15.2

R0.1

K15.4
(OUT)

K15.2

Mnemonic Program
STR
OR
ANN
OUT

R0.1
K15.2
M0.5
K15.4

STR
OR
OUT

R0.1
K15.2
K15.4

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

5-Digit Display

Remarks

Search for instruction to delete

AND NOT M 5 SCH

AND NOT M

DEL

AND NOT M

d.0005

Ready to delete marked with d.

ENT

OUT K

01504

Next instruction will be displayed

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Change Instruction
In the example below, the address of one contact is changed in the rung of ladder, as shown.

Function: Change an existing step in the D50 PLC program

PLC Mode: STOP

Ladder Program
R0.3

M12.14

TIM

R0.3

K0.3

TIM

Ch = 10
SV = 240

Ch = 10
SV = 240

Mnemonic Program
STR
AND
TIM

R0.3
M12.14
10
240

STR
ANN
TIM

R0.3
K0.3
10

240

Operating Procedure
Display
5-Digit Display

Remarks

AND M 1 2 1 4 SCH

AND M

01214

Search for instruction to change

AND NOT K 3 ENT

AND NOT K

Enter the changed instruction

NXT

OUT TIM

ch010

View next instruction

PRE

AND NOT K

00003

Verify instruction was changed

Key Sequence

LED

199

200

D320 PLC User's Manual

Error Checking
The D50 has built-in error-checking routines that can check the PLC program for syntax errors such as
multiple output coils using the same reference, invalid coil addresses, and so on. The D50 pocket
editor can request an error check from the D50 PLC using the SHF and CHK keys.
To start the error check, press the SHF key, and then the CHK key. If errors are detected, the 5 digit
display will show an E followed by a two-digit error code. If no errors are detected, the current
instruction will be display with no change.

Function: Check the program in the D50 PLC for syntax errors

PLC Mode: STOP

Error Codes
Error Number

Error Name

Error Description

E10

I/O Overrange

I/O address specified in an instruction is too high or low

E11

T/C Overrange

T/C Channel number outside the range 0-255

E12

Word Overrange

Word register address specified is too high or low

E13

Illegal Code

An undefined function code has been used

E14

User Memory Error

Error occurred while writing an instruction to the user memory

E15

System Operation

Miscellaneous undefined error has occurred

E16

User Memory Failure

User program checksum error invalid memory

E17

I/O Mismatch

Mismatch between physical I/O and program

E18

JMP/CALL

A jump or call to an undefined label or subroutine

E19

LBL Number Error

LBL instruction number has been duplicated

E20

JMPS/JMPE

The JMPS/JMPE instructions are not properly paired

E21

FOR/NEXT

The FOR/NEXT instructions are not properly paired

E22

SBR/RET

The SBR/RET instructions are not properly paired

E23

END

The END instruction is missing

E30

Not Found

Instruction searched for was not found

E31

CPU Running

Program may not be edited while CPU is in RUN mode

E32

Overrange Error

An operation has tried to use a value that is out of range

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

201

Monitor I/O
There are two types of monitoring that the pocket editor can perform. The first type is bit monitoring,
which displays the state of a given contact or coil in the program. The second type of monitoring is
register monitoring, which displays the 16-bit value of any user-specified register address. The
monitor mode can also be used to force output bits to a given state, On or Off.

Bit Monitoring
I/O bits (contacts and coils) can only be monitored through the PLC program. At each step in the PLC
program, the ON LED will reflect the state of the bit address in that step of the program. If the ON
LED is lit, the bit address displayed is in the On state.

Function: Monitor the state of a contact in the program

PLC Mode: RUN

Ladder Program
R0.1

R15.0
(OUT)

R0.1

Mnemonic Program
STR
ORN
OUT

R0.1
R0.1
R15.0

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence
OUT R 1 5 0 0 SCH

LED
OUT ON R

5-Digit Display

Remarks

01500

Finds step, displays On/Off status

202

D320 PLC User's Manual

Register Monitoring
Any valid register address can be monitored using the register monitor mode of the pocket editor. In
this mode, the register is continuously updated from the D50 PLC, and can be changed by the user.
To enter the monitor register mode, press the SHF key, the register address, and then the MON (DIF)
key. Use the NXT and PRE keys to move to the next or previous register address. To change the
value, press the 0 (NOT) key, followed by the new value and the enter (ENT) key. To display the
address of the register being monitored, press the ENT key. To exit the monitor register mode, press
the Clear (CLR) key.

Function: Monitor/Change the value of a register

PLC Mode: RUN

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

5-Digit Display

Remarks

SHF W 0 MON

LED

00000

Displays the current value of W0

NXT

00000

Displays the current value of W1

00001

Displays the address W1

ENT

PRE

00000

Displays the address W0

ENT

00000

Displays the current value of W0

Enters the Change Value mode

1 2 3

123

Enter the new value for W0

ENT

00123

Displays the current value of W0

CLR

End

Exit monitor mode

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

203

Force Outputs
The states of output coils can be forced On or Off in the D50 PLC. The output to be forced must be an
output that has been programmed in the PLC. The SET and RST keys are used for Force On and Force
Off, respectively. Using the NXT or PRE keys will clear the force from the coil and move to the next
or previous instruction. The CLR key will remove the force while continuing to display that
instruction.

Function: Force an output to either an On or Off state

PLC Mode: RUN

Ladder Program
R0.1

R0.3

R15.1
(OUT)

M0.0

R0.4

R15.2
(OUT)

K1.2

R1.2

R17.3
(OUT)

Mnemonic Program
STR
AND
OUT
STR
OR
AND
OUT
STR
OUT

R0.1
R0.3
R15.1
M0.0
K1.2
R0.4
R15.2
R1.2
R17.3

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

5-Digit Display

Remarks

OUT R 1 5 0 1 SCH

OUT R

01501

Finds step, displays On/Off status

SET ENT

OUT ON R

01501

Force ON

RST ENT

OUT R

01501

Force OFF

SET ENT

OUT ON R

01501

Force ON

NXT

STR M

00000

Release force, go to next step

OUT R 1 7 0 3 SCH

OUT ON R

01703

Find instruction

RST ENT

OUT R

01703

Force OFF

SET ENT

OUT ON R

01703

Force ON

CLR

OUT ON R

01703

Release force, continue to display

204

D320 PLC User's Manual

Run/Stop PLC
When the RUN/STOP switch on the D50 PLC is in the RUN position, the mode can be overridden by
the pocket editor. To place the D50 PLC in STOP, press the INS key, followed by the RST key. To
return the PLC to the RUN mode, press the INS key followed by the SET key.

Function: Clear the program in the D50 PLC

PLC Mode: STOP

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence
INS

LED
RUN

RST
INS
SET

RUN

5-Digit Display

Remarks

AUX

Switches to Auxiliary Mode

End

PLC is stopped

AUX

Switches to Auxiliary Mode

End

PLC switched to RUN

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Instruction Codes
The following tables list the key sequences required to enter each of the mnemonic instructions
supported by the D50 PLC.

Basic Instructions
Mnemonic
Instruction

Display
Key Sequence

LED

STR

STR

STR

STN

STR NOT

STR NOT

AND

AND

AND

ANN

AND NOT

AND NOT

OR

5-Digit Display

OR

OR

ORN

OR NOT

OR NOT

ANB

AND MCS

AND MCS

ORB

OR MCS

OR MCS

OUT

OUT

OUT

NOT

NOT

NOT

MCS

MCS

MCS

MCR

MCR

MCR

SET

SET

SET

RST

RST

RST

STR DIF

STR DIF

STR DIF

AND DIF

AND DIF

AND DIF

OR DIF

OR DIF

STR DFN

STR DIF NOT

STR DIF NOT

AND DFN

AND DIF NOT

AND DIF NOT

OR DIF NOT

OR DIF NOT

TIM

OUT TIM

OUT TIM

ch

SST

OUT SST

OUT SST

ch

UC

OUT CNT

OUT CNT

UC

DC

OUT CNT NXT

OUT CNT

dC

OUT CNT NXT NXT

OUT CNT

Ud

OR DIF

OR DFN

UDC

Note: Instructions ANB, ORB, MCS, and MCR require no operand.

205

206

D320 PLC User's Manual

Advanced Instructions
Instruction

Function No.

Instruction

Function No.

STR ==S1, S2

FUN 1

ADD D, S1, S2

FUN 35

AND ==S1, S2

FUN 2

ADC D, S1, S2

FUN 36

OR ==S1, S2

FUN 3

SUB D, S1, S2

FUN 37

STR <> S1, S2

FUN 4

SBC D, S1, S2

FUN 38

AND <> S1, S2

FUN 5

MUL D, S1, S2

FUN 39

OR <> S1, S2

FUN 6

DIV D, S1, S2

FUN 40

STR > S1, S2

FUN 7

ADDB D, S1, S2

FUN 41

AND > S1, S2

FUN 8

ADCB D, S1, S2

FUN 42

OR > S1, S2

FUN 9

SUBB D, S1, S2

FUN 43

STR <= S1, S2

FUN 10

SBCB D, S1, S2

FUN 44

AND <= S1, S2

FUN 11

MULB D, S1, S2

FUN 45

OR <= S1, S2

FUN 12

DIVB D, S1, S2

FUN 46

STR >= S1, S2

FUN 13

WAND D, S1, S2

FUN 47

AND >= S1, S2

FUN 14

WOR D, S1, S2

FUN 48

OR >= S1, S2

FUN 15

XOR D, S1, S2

FUN 49

STR < S1, S2

FUN 16

XNR D, S1, S2

FUN 50

AND < S1, S2

FUN 17

XCHG D1, D2

FUN 51

OR < S1, S2

FUN 18

LDR D, Sr

FUN 52

INC D

FUN 19

STO Sr, D

FUN 53

DEC D

FUN 20

FOR D

FUN 54

INCB D

FUN 21

STR D== S1,S2

FUN 55

DECB D

FUN 22

AND D==S1, S2

FUN 56

ABS D

FUN 23

OR D==S1, S2

FUN 57

NEG D

FUN 24

STR D<> S1, S2

FUN 58

NOT D

FUN 25

AND D<> S1, S2

FUN 59

RLC D, N

FUN 26

OR D<> S1, S2

FUN 60

RRC D, N

FUN 27

STR D> S1, S2

FUN 61

ROL D, N

FUN 28

AND D> S1, S2

FUN 62

ROR D, N

FUN 29

OR D> S1, S2

FUN 63

SHL D, N

FUN 30

STR D<= S1, S2

FUN 64

SHR D, N

FUN 31

AND D<= S1, S2

FUN 65

LET D, S

FUN 32

OR D<= S1, S2

FUN 66

BCD D, S

FUN 33

STR D>= S1, S2

FUN 67

BIN D, S

FUN 34

AND D>= S1, S2

FUN 68

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Instruction

Function No.

Instruction

Function No.

OR D>= S1, S2

FUN 69

DOR D, S1, S2

FUN 102

STR D< S1, S2

FUN 70

DXOR D, S1, S2

FUN 103

AND D< S1, S2

FUN 71

DXNR D, S1, S2

FUN 104

OR D< S1, S2

FUN 72

DXCHG D1, D2

FUN 105

DINC D

FUN 73

DLDR D, Sr

FUN 106

DDEC D

FUN 74

DSTO Sr, D

FUN 107

DINCB D

FUN 75

DFOR D

FUN 108

DDECB D

FUN 76

DIS D, Nd, Sr

FUN 109

DABS D

FUN 77

UNI D, Sr, Nd

FUN 110

DNEG D

FUN 78

MOV D, Sr, Ns

FUN 111

DNOT D

FUN 79

FMOV D, Ns, V

FUN 112

DRLC D, N

FUN 80

BMOV D, Sr, Ns

FUN 113

DRRC D, N

FUN 81

BFMV D, Ns, V

FUN 114

DROL D, N

FUN 82

BSET D, N

FUN 115

DROR D, N

FUN 83

BRST D, N

FUN 116

DSHL D, N

FUN 84

BNOT D, N

FUN 117

DSHR D, N

FUN 85

BTST D, N

FUN 118

DLET D, S

FUN 86

DECO D, S

FUN 119

DBCD D, S

FUN 87

ENCO D, S

FUN 120

DBIN D, S

FUN 88

SEG D, S

FUN 121

DADD D, S1, S2

FUN 89

SUM D, S

FUN 122

DADC D, S1, S2

FUN 90

JMP L

FUN 123

DSUB D, S1, S2

FUN 91

CALL Sb

FUN 124

DSBC D, S1, S2

FUN 92

LBL L

FUN 125

DMUL D, S1, S2

FUN 93

SBR Sb

FUN 126

DDIV D, S1, S2

FUN 94

JMPS

FUN 127

DADDB D, S1, S2

FUN 95

NEXT

FUN 128

DADCB D, S1, S2

FUN 96

SC

FUN 129

DSUBB D, S1, S2

FUN 97

RC

FUN 130

DSBCB D, S1, S2

FUN 98

CC

FUN 131

DMULB D, S1, S2

FUN 99

JMPE

FUN 132

DDIVB D, S1, S2

FUN 100

RET

FUN 133

DAND D, S1, S2

FUN 101

END

FUN 134

207

208

D320 PLC User's Manual

Programming Examples
The following pages present some very basic programming examples, showing how to enter mnemonic
code into the D50 PLC using the pocket editor. Each example program is devided into three sections;
the ladder program, the equivalent mnemonic code, and the key sequence for entering the program
using the pocket editor

Example 1 Basic Instructions


Ladder Program
R0.3

M0.0

M0.2

M0.1

M0.3

M0.4

M1.0

M1.1

M1.2

F0.15

Mnemonic Program
STR
MCS
STR
OR
STR
OR
ANB
NOT
OUT
STR
AND
STR
AND
ORB
OUT
STR
MCR

R0.3
M0.0
M0.1
M0.2
M0.3
M0.4
M0.4
M1.0
M1.1
M1.2
R15.2
F0.15

(MCS)
M0.4
(OUT)

R15.2
(OUT)

(MCR)

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

LED

STR R 3 INS

STR R

MCS INS

MCS

5-Digit Display

Mnemonic Instruction

STR

R0.3

MCS

STR M 0 INS

STR M

STR

M0.0

OR M 1 INS

OR M

OR

M0.1

STR M 2 INS

STR M

STR

M0.2

OR M 3 INS

OR M

OR

M0.3

AND MCS INS

AND MCS

ANB

NOT INS

NOT

NOT

OUT M 4 INS

OUT M

STR M 4 INS

STR M

AND M 1 0 0 INS

AND M

STR M 1 0 1 INS

OUT

M0.4

STR

M0.4

100

AND

M1.0

STR M

101

STR

M1.1

AND M 1 0 2 INS

AND M

102

AND

M1.2

OR MCS INS

OR MCS

OUT R 1 5 0 2 INS

OUT R

1502

OUT

R15.2

STR F 1 5 INS

STR F

15

STR

F0.15

MCR INS

MCR

ORB

MCR

209

210

D320 PLC User's Manual

Example 2 Timer Instructions


Ladder Program
R1.3

TIM

M14.14

SST

Ch = 255
SV = 100

Ch = 254
SV = 50

TC255

M5.2
(SET)

TC254

M0.10
(RST)

Mnemonic Program
STR
TIM
STR
SST
STR
SET
STR
RST

R1.3
255
100
M14.14
254
50
TC255
M5.2
TC254
M0.10

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

5-Digit Display

Mnemonic Instruction

STR R 1 0 3 INS

STR R

LED

103

STR

R1.3

OUT TIM 2 5 5 ENT

OUT TIM

ch255

TIM

255

100
100

100

TIM

255

STR M 1 4 1 4 INS

STR M

1414

STR

M14.14

OUT SST 2 5 4 ENT

OUT SST

ch254

SST

254

50

50

SST

254

50

1 0 0 INS

5 0 INS
STR TIM 2 5 5 INS

STR TC

255

STR

TC255

SET M 5 0 2 INS

STR M

502

SET

M5.2

STR TIM 2 5 4 INS

STR TC

254

STR

TC254

RST M 1 0

RST M

10

RST

M0.10

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Example 3 Counter Instructions


Ladder Program
M0.10

UC

U Ch = 25
SV = 100

M0.11
R

M0.12

DC

D Ch = 255
SV = 100

M0.13
R

TC25

M0.11
(SET)

TC255

M0.13
(SET)

Mnemonic Program
STR
STR
UC
STR
STR
DC
STR
SET
STR
SET

M0.10
M0.11
25
100
M0.12
M0.13
255
100
TC25
M0.11
TC255
M0.13

211

212

D320 PLC User's Manual

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

5-Digit Display

Mnemonic Instruction

STR M 1 0 INS

STR M

LED

10

STR

M0.10

STR M 1 1 INS

STR M

11

STR

M0.11

OUT CNT 2 5 ENT

OUT CNT

1 0 0 INS

UC 25

UC

25

100

100

UC

25

100

STR M 1 2 INS

STR M

12

STR

M0.12

STR M 1 3 INS

STR M

13

STR

M0.13

OUT CNT

OUT CNT

UC

NXT

OUT CNT

dC

DC

255

100

2 5 5 ENT

OUT CNT

dC255

DC

255

100
100

100

DC

255

STR TIM 2 5 INS

STR TC

25

STR

TC25

SET M 1 1 INS

SET M

11

SET

M0.11

STR TIM 2 5 5 INS

STR TC

255

STR

TC255

SET M 1 3 INS

SET M

13

SET

M0.13

1 0 0 INS

Appendix C: D50PGM10 Pocket Editor

Example 4 Comparison/Advanced Instructions


Ladder Program
==

INC

A = K0
B = K1

D = K4

==

A = 100
B = K3

Mnemonic Program
STR== K0
OR== 100
INC
K4

K1
K3

Operating Procedure
Display
Key Sequence

5-Digit Display

Mnemonic Instruction

SHF FUN 1

Fn 1

STR== K0

K1

ENT

S1
STR== K0

K1

K 0

LED

STR== K0

K1

ENT

Fn. 1

STR== K0

K1

INS

End

SHF FUN 3

Fn 3

OR==

100

K3

ENT

S1

1 0 0

100

OR==

100

K3

ENT

S2
3

OR==

100

K1

ENT

Fn. 3

OR==

100

K1

INS

End

SHF FUN 1 9

Fn 19

INC

K4

ENT
K 1

K 3

S2

ENT

d
4

INC

K4

ENT

Fn. 19

INC

K4

INS

End

K 4

213

214

D320 PLC User's Manual

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.

CURSO: CONTROLADOR

PRACTICA NO.1.

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

OBJETIVOS DE LA PRACTICA.
AL TERMINO DE ESTA PRACTICA USTED SERA CAPAZ DE:

IDENTIFICAR LAS PARTES BASICAS DEL PLC D50


RECONOCER LAS ESPECIFICACIONES DE ALIMENTACION, ENTRADA Y SALIDA DEL PLC.
DETERMINAR LAS DIRECCIONES DE I/O CORRESPONDIENTES A TODAS LAS TERMINALES
DE CONEXIN DEL PLC PARA DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA Y SALIDA.
CONECTAR CORRECTAMENTE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA Y SALIDA A LAS
TERMINALES DEL PLC.
RESOLVER LA FORMA DE EXPANDIR LOS PUNTOS DE ENTRADA/SALIDA EXTERNAS.

EQUIPO, HERRAMIENTAS, INSTALACIONES Y SUMINISTROS.

SISTEMA ENTRENADOR DE PLC D50.


TERMINALES Y CABLES ACCESORIOS.
CONVERTIDOR DE INTERFASE.
MANUAL DEL HARDWARE.

MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD.

EQUIPO Y TERMINALES DE CONEXIN EN BUEN ESTADO.


MANTENGA UN AISLAMIENTO PERSONAL EFECTIVO CON RESPECTO A TIERRA.
NO REALISE NI MODIFIQUE NINGUNA CONEXIN CON EL CIRCUITO ENERGIZADO.
APLIQUE LAS NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD.
NO JUEGUE Y NO SE DISTRAIGA.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

DESARROLLO PRACTICO.
1.

DEL SISTEMA ENTRENADOR DE PLC REALISE CON DETALLE EL DIBUJO DESCRIPTIVO


DEL:

PROGRAMADOR DE MANO PGM-10.


UNIDAD BASE PLC D50.
UNIDAD DE EXPANSION PLC D50.
CONVERTIDOR DE PROTOCOLO RS485/RS232.
CABLE PARA EL PROGRAMADOR.

2.

IDENTIFIQUE LOS LEDS INDICADORES, INTERRUPTOR DE ESTADO DEL PLC Y LOS


CONECTORES DE LOS PUERTOS DE COMUNICACION Y DE EXPANSION DE
ENTRADAS/SALIDAS PARA CADA UNIDAD DEL PLC.

3.

ACOMPLETE LOS SIGUIENTES CUADROS DE ESPECIFICACIONES OBTENIENDO LA


INFORMACION DE LOS DATOS DE PLACA O DE LAS LEYENDAS IMPRESAS EN CADA
UNIDAD O BIEN CONSULTANDO EL MANUAL DE HARDWARE DEL PLC D50 (SECCION 6).

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES.
CONCEPTO
TENSION DE ALIMENTACION
MAXIMO CONSUMO DE
POTENCIA
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE
DE OPERACIN
HUMEDAD DE OPERACIN
RESISTENCIA A LA
VIBRACION
RESISTENCIA AL RUIDO
RESISTENCIA DE
AISLAMIENTO
RESISTENCIA AL IMPACTO
VELOCIDAD DE
PROCESAMIENTO
CAPACIDAD DE LA
MEMORIA DEL USUARIO
TIPO DE MEMORIA
NO.DE INSTRUCCIONES
BASICAS
NO.DE INSTRUCCIONES DE
COMPARASION
NO.DE INSTRUCCIONES
ARITMETICAS
NO.DE INSTRUCCIONES
ESPECIALES
NO.DE PUNTOS EXTERNOS
DE I/O
NO.DE SALIDAS INTERNAS
RETENTIVAS
NO.DE SALIDAS INTERNAS
NO RETENTIVAS
NO.SALIDAS INTERNAS
ESPECIALES
NO.DE PALABRAS INTERNAS
DE SALIDA
NO.DE TEMPORIZADORES Y
CONTADORES
NO.DE TEMPORIZADORES
DE 0.01 S
NO.DE TEMPORIZADORES
DE 0.1 S
NO.DE CONTADORES DE
ALTA VELOCIDAD
NO.DE SALIDAS DE PULSO
VELOCIDAD DEL PUERTO DE
COMUNICACIN
TIPO DE CONVERTIDOR DE
PROTOCOLO

ESPECIFICACION

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

ESPECIFICACIONES DE ENTRADA DE 110 V C.A.


CONCEPTO
TIPO DE TENSION DE ENTRADA
TENSION NOMINAL
TENSION DE ENTRADA
MIN.
CORRIENTE DE ENTRADA
MIN.
TENSION
MIN.TENSION DE ON.
DE OPERACION
MAX.TENSION
DE
OFF
TIEMPO
DE OFF. A ON.
RETARDO
DE ON. A OFF.
ENTRADA
NUMERO DE PUNTOS DE ENTRADA
PUNTOS DE ENTRADA CON TERMINAL
COMUN
POLARIDAD EN LA ENTRADA
TIPO DE AISLAMIENTO

CIRCUITO
DE
CONFIGURACION
ALAMBRADO EXTERNO

ESPECIFICACION

MAX.
MAX.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

ESPECIFICACIONES DE SALIDA POR RELEVADOR.


CONCEPTO
TIPO DE SALIDA
TENSION NOMINAL
TENSION DE SALIDA
MAXIMA
1 CIRCUITO
CORRIENTE DE
4 CIRCUITOS
CARGA
MINIMA CORRIENTE 1 CIRCUITO
DE CARGA
TIEMPO DE
ON.A OFF.
RETARDO MAXIMO OFF.A ON.
DE SALIDA
NUMERO DE PUNTOS DE SALIDA
PUNTOS DE SALIDA CON TERMINAL
COMUN
TIPO DE AISLAMIENTO

CIRCUITO DE CONFIGURACION Y
ALAMBRADO EXTERNO

ESPECIFICACION

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

ESPECIFICACIONES DEL PROGRAMADOR PGM-10.


CONCEPTO
DISPOSITIVO A INTERCONECTAR
TIPO DE CONVERTIDOR DE PROTOCOLO
ABASTECIMIENTO DE POTENCIA
INDICADOR
DISPLAY
TECLADO

CAPACIDAD DEL
DISPLAY
NO.DE TECLAS

ESPECIFICACION

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

4.

PARA LA SIGUIENTE TABLA DETERMINE LAS DIRECCIONES DE ENTRADA/SALIDA DE


LAS TERMINALES DE I/O DEL PLC D50 (CONSULTA EL APENDICE A DEL MANUAL DEL
HARDWARE).

ASIGNACION DE DIRECCIONES PARA TERMINALES DE


ENTRADA/SALIDA.
UNIDAD

TERMINALES
DE ENTRADA
C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7

DIRECCION DE
ENTRADA

TERMINALES
DE SALIDA
C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
--C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
--C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
--C-0
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
---

DIRECCION DE
SALIDA

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

5.

REALISE EL DIAGRAMA DE EXPANSION DE UNIDADES PARA AMPLIAR LOS PUNTOS


DE ENTRADA Y SALIDA DEL PLC D50.

6.

DETERMINE LAS DIRECCIONES DE ENTRADA/SALIDA INTERNAS DEL MICROPLC.

DIRECCIONES DE ENTRADA/SALIDA INTERNAS


TIPO

CAPACIDAD

NUMERO DE
BIT

NUMERO DE
PALABRA

OBSERVACIONES

RELEVADORES
AUXILIARES

RELEVADORES
RETENTIVOS
RELEVADORES
ESPECIALES
REGISTROS
ARITMETICOS

7.

DE ACUERDO A LAS CONFIGURACIONES DE ALAMBRADO EXTERIOR DE ENTRADAS Y


SALIDAS DEL MICROPLC D50, ELABORE EL DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES PARA
CONECTAR LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA/SALIDA A LA RESPECTIVA TERMINAL DEL
PLC, TAL COMO LO INDICA LA SIGUIENTE TABLA:
DISPOSITIVO DE ENTRADA/SALIDA

BOTON PULSADOR N.A.


BOTON PULSADOR N.C
FIN DE CARRERA N.A.
FIN DE CARRERA N.C.
CONTACTO N.C. DEL RELE DE SOBRECARGA
INTERRUPTOR DE FLOTADOR N.A.
INTERRUPTOR DE FLOTADOR N.C.
CONTACTO N.A. DEL RELE DE SOBRECARGA
INTERRUPTOR DE PRESION N.A.
INTERRUPTOR DE PRESION N.C.
ALARMA 12 VDC
LAMPARA PILOTO VERDE 127 VAC
LAMPARA PILOTO ROJO 127 VAC
SOLENOIDE DE ELECTROVALVULA 12 VDC
BOBINA DE CONTACTOR 127 VAC
BOBINA DE CONTACTOR 127 VAC
BOBINA DE RELE DE CONTROL 127 VAC
LAMPARA PILOTO AMBAR 127 VAC

TERMINAL DE
ENTRADA/SALIDA
C-0
C-1
C-4
C-5
C-7
C-2
C-3
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-O
C-1
C-2
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5

MODULO DEL PLC


D50
BASE
BASE
BASE
BASE
BASE
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
BASE
BASE
BASE
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION
EXPANSION

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES ENTRE PLC Y DISPOSITIVOS DE I/O.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

8.

10

DE ACUERDO A SU DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES, CONECTE EN EL SISTEMA


ENTRENADOR DE PLC LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA/SALIDA INDICADOS
ANTERIORMENTE Y SOLICITE EL VISTO BUENO.

VO.BO._________________
CONCLUSIONES.

CUESTIONARIO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

QU SIGNIFICA PLC?
QUE ENTIENDE POR HARDWARE?
A QUE SE LE LLAMA DIRECCION DE ENTRADA Y/O SALIDA?
EN QUE POSICION SE DEBE COLOCAR EL INTERRUPTOR DE ESTADO DEL PLC PARA QUE
SE EJECUTE EL PROGRAMA DEL USUARIO?
USO DEL CONVERTIDOR DE PROTOCOLO?
MENCIONA LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE PROGRAMACION MS COMUNES QUE UTILIZA UN
PLC.

REFERENCIA BIBLIOGRAFICA.

MANUAL DEL HARDAWARE DEL CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE D50 /CUTLER HAMMER


ELECTRONICA INDUSTRIAL MODERNA / MALONEY / PRENTICE HALL.
INTRODUCCION A LOS CONTROLADORES LOGICOS PROGRAMABLES / FESTO DIDACTIC.
NEUMATICA BASICA / MANESMAN REXROTH.
SISTEMAS HEURISTICOS / CONTROLADOR LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50

SEP

11

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEMS

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.
CURSO: CONTROLADOR

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

EVALUACION DE COMPETENCIA LABORAL

LISTA DE COTEJO
PRACTICA NO.1.

HARDWARE DEL PLC D50.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

NO.
1

4
5

REACTIVO

CUMPLIMIENTO
SI
NO

OBSERVACIN

Consulto el Manual de Hardware para


identificar las caractersticas elctricas
generales del PLC.
Conecto adecuadamente el PLC a la fuente de
energa elctrica conforme a datos del
fabricante.
Conecto correctamente los dispositivos de
entrada-salida conforme lo indican los
diagramas del manual del usuario
Identifico las direcciones absolutas de los
registros sobre los terminales de entrada-salida.
Reconoce el interruptor de estado del PLC,
puertos de comunicacin e indicadores de
entrada-salida.
Menciona los nombres de los accesorios
complementarios del PLC

FIRMAN DE COMUN ACUERDO

CAPACITANDO
_____________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

EVALUADOR
________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.

CURSO: CONTROLADOR

PRACTICA NO.2.

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

OBJETIVOS DE LA PRACTICA.
AL TERMINO DE ESTA PRACTICA USTED SERA CAPAZ DE:

MANEJAR EL SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50 Y EL EQUIPO DE COMPUTO.


PREPARAR SU DISCO DE TRABAJO CREANDO LOS DIRECTORIOS NECESARIOS PARA
ALMACENAR LAS EDICIONES DE SUS PROGRAMAS.
IDENTIFICAR LA RUTA DE ACCESO PARA EJECUTAR EL PROGRAMA WINGPC O
SOFTWARE DEL PLC.
EDITAR PROGRAMAS EN LENGUAJE DE ESCALERA O LADDER UTILIZANDO LAS BARRAS
DE INSTRUCCIONES Y DE AYUDA.
IDENTIFICAR LA FORMADE CERRAR EL PROGRAMA WINGPC.

EQUIPO, HERRAMIENTAS, INSTALACIONES Y SUMINISTROS.

DISCO FLEXIBLE NUEVO DE 3.5 ALTA DENSIDAD.


COMPUTADORA PERSONAL PENTIUN.
MANUAL DEL SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50 Y MANUAL DE GUIA RAPIDA.

MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD.

EQUIPO EN BUEN ESTADO.


MANTENGA UN AISLAMIENTO PERSONAL EFECTIVO CON RESPECTO A TIERRA.
PROHIBIDO ENTRAR A OTROS PROGRAMAS INSTALADOS EN LA COMPUTADORA
APLIQUE LAS NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD.
NO JUEGUE Y NO SE DISTRAIGA.

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50

DESARROLLO PRACTICO.

PREPARACION DEL DISCO DE TRABAJO.


PARA CREAR EN SU DISCO FLEXIBLE LOS DIRECTORIOS DONDE ALMACENARA LOS
PROGRAMAS QUE EDITARA, SIGA LOS SIGUIENTES PASOS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

ENCIENDA EL MONITOR Y LA CPU (UNIDAD CENTRAL DE PROCESAMIENTO).


ESPERE A QUE S INICIALISE WINDOWS 95 HASTA QUE APARESCA EN LA PANTALLA EL
PAPEL TAPIZ CON DIVERSOS ICONOS.
POSICIONE EL PUNTERO DEL RATON EN EL ICONO INICIO Y DE CLICK.
NOTA: CLICK SIGNIFICA OPRIMIR EL BOTON IZQUIERDO DEL RATON UNA SOLA VEZ.
COLOQUE EL PUNTERO DEL MOUSE EN "PROGRAMAS" Y DESPUES DE QUE APARESCA EL
MENU RESPECTIVO, DESPLAZELO HASTA EL ICONO DEL MS-DOS DANDO "CLICK".
INSERTE UN DISCO FLEXIBLE EN LA UNIDAD A Y OPRIMA LAS TECLAS QUE INDICA EL
SIGUIENTE CUADRO CON EL OBJETO DE CREAR LOS DIRECTORIOS "GPC" Y "PLCD50".

SECUENCIA DE TECLAS
A: ENTER
MD GPC ENTER
CD GPC ENTER
MD PLCD50 ENTER
CD PLCD50 ENTER
MD LADDER ENTER

FUNCION
CAMBIO A LA UNIDAD DE DISCO FLEXIBLE
CREACION DEL DIRECTORIO GPC
CAMBIO AL DIRECTORIO GPC
CREACION DEL DIRECTORIO PLCD50
CAMBIO AL DIRECTORIO PLCD50
CREACION DEL DIRECTORIO LADDER

EJECUCION DEL PROGRAMA "GPC"


PARA ENTRAR AL SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50 ES NECESARIO EJECUTAR EL PROGRAMA "GPC"
DESDE EL DIRECTORIO "GPC" DE LA UNIDAD "C" DEL DISCO DURO DE LA COMPUTADORA.
6. OPRIMA LAS TECLAS QUE INDICA EL SIGUIENTE CUADRO.
SECUENCIA DE TECLAS
C: ENTER
CD .. ENTER
CD GPC ENTER
GPC ENTER
7.

FUNCION
CAMBIO A LA UNIDAD "C" DEL DISCO DURO
CAMBIO AL DIRECTORIO RAIZ DE "C"
CAMBIO AL DIRECTORIO "GPC"
EJECUCION DEL PROGRAMA "GPC"

LA INICIALIZACION DEL SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50 INCLUYE EL DESPLEGADO EN


PANTALLA DEL LOGOTIPO DE CUTLER HAMMER Y UNA VENTANA CON MENU DE 7
OPCIONES.

EDICION EN DIAGRAMAS DE ESCALERA.


PARA EDITAR UN PROGRAMA EN LOGICA DE DIAGRAMAS DE ESCALERA ES NECESARIO
ENTRAR AL MODO DE PROGRAMACION LADDER; INGRESAR EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO
QUE ALMACENARA EL PROGRAMA DE USUARIO Y DESPUES CON LOS MENUS DE
INSTRUCCIONES Y DE AYUDA CONSTRUIR EL DIAGRAMA RESPECTIVO.
PARA REALISAR LO ANTERIOR, CONTINUE CON LOS SIGUIENTES PASOS:
8.

ELIJA LA OPCION [2] "PROGRAMMING"


DESPLAZAMIENTO Y DE EJECUCION (ENTER).

CON

AYUDA

DE

LAS

TECLAS

DE

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50

9.
10.
11.
12.

13.
14.

PARA EL NUEVO MENU SELECCIONE LA OPCION [1] "LADDER" OPRIMIENDO LA TECLA


ENTER.
ESCRIBA EDICION1 EN EL RECUADRO NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO Y OPRIMA LA TECLA
ENTER.
REPRODUSCA EL DIAGRAMA EDICION1 QUE VIENE EN HOJAS ANEXAS, UTILIZANDO
LAS TECLAS RESPECTIVAS DEL MENU DE INSTRUCCIONES Y DE AYUDA.
EL MENU DE AYUDA SIRVE PARA CORREGIR LOS ERRORES GENERADOS DURANTE LA
EDICION DEL PROGRAMA Y SE LLAMA OPRIMIENDO AL MISMO TIEMPO LAS TECLAS
ALT + H.
DURANTE LA EDICION NO SE OLVIDE DE SALVAR SU TRABAJO
REPITA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EDITAR LOS PROGRAMAS:
EDICION2
EDICION3
EDICION4

SALIR DEL PROGRAMA GPC.


PARA SALIR DEL MODO DE EDICION DEL PROGRAMA OPRIMA LA TECLA ESCAPE Y
CONTESTE LA VENTANA DE DIALOGO CON Y (YES). VUELVA A PULSAR ESCAPE Y
SELECCIONE LA OPCION [7] EXIT A DOS CON LAS TECLAS DE DESPLAZAMIENTO DEL
CURSOR Y DE EJECUCION (ENTER).

CONCLUSIONES.

CUESTIONARIO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

QU ENTIENDE POR SOFTWARE?


DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EJECUTAR EL PROGRAMA GPC.
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EDITAR PROGRAMAS EN DIAGRAMAS DE
ESCALERA.
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA SALIR DEL MODO EDICION DE PROGRAMAS DE
ESCALERA.
DESCRIBA LOS COMANDOS DE AYUDA DURANTE LA EDICION EN LADDER

REFERENCIA BIBLIOGRAFICA.

MANUAL DEL SOFTWARE DEL CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE D50 / CUTLER HAMMER


MANUAL DE INICIO RAPIDO DEL MICROPLC D50 / CUTLER HAMMER
ELECTRONICA INDUSTRIAL MODERNA / MALONEY / PRENTICE HALL.

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.
CURSO: CONTROLADOR

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

EVALUACION DE COMPETENCIA LABORAL

LISTA DE COTEJO
PRACTICA NO.2.

SOFTWARE DEL PLC D50.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

NO.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7

REACTIVO

CUMPLIMIENTO
SI
NO

OBSERVACIN

Se consulta el Manual de Software para


identificar los requerimientos del sistema para
instalacin del programa.
La instalacin del programa es satisfactoria
Abre y cierra el programa
Identifica el espacio-ambiente del programa
Crea, guarda y abre un proyecto
Edita un diagrama escalera bsico con
direcciones absolutas
Crea una tabla de etiquetas y comentarios
referidas a las direcciones absolutas

FIRMAN DE COMUN ACUERDO

CAPACITANDO
_____________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

EVALUADOR
________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.

CURSO: CONTROLADOR

PRACTICA NO.4.

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

INSTRUCCIONES DE ENTRADA-SALIDA

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

OBJETIVOS DE LA PRACTICA.
AL TERMINO DE ESTA PRACTICA USTED:

RECONOCERA UN SISTEMA DE TRABAJO PARA RESOLVER PROBLEMAS MEDIANTE PLC.


PROGRAMARA EN LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES Y/O EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS LAS
INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR
SALIDA.
IDENTIFICARA LOS PROCEDIMIENTOS PARA EDITAR, CORREGIR, COMPILAR, TANSFERIR
Y MODIFICAR EN LINEA UN PROGRAMA.
COMPROBARA EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE SU PROGRAMA.

EQUIPO, HERRAMIENTAS, INSTALACIONES Y SUMINISTROS.

SISTEMA ENTRENADOR DE PLC D50.


TERMINALES DE CONEXION.
CABLE DE PROGRAMACION.
CONVERTIDOR DE INTERFASE.
COMPUTADORA PERSONAL
DISCO FLEXIBLE DE 3.5 HD

MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD.

EQUIPO Y TERMINALES DE CONEXIN EN BUEN ESTADO.


MANTENGA UN AISLAMIENTO PERSONAL EFECTIVO CON RESPECTO A TIERRA.
PROHIBIDO ENTRAR A OTROS PROGRAMAS INSTALADOS EN LA COMPUTADORA
NO REALISE NI MODIFIQUE NINGUNA CONEXIN CON EL CIRCUITO ENERGIZADO.
APLIQUE LAS NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD.
NO JUEGUE Y NO SE DISTRAIGA.

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

DESARROLLO PRACTICO.

1. PLANTEAMIENTO DE LAS TAREAS.


CONSIDERACIONES: LAMPARAS PILOTO DE 127 VAC Y ALARMAS DE 12 VDC.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

ENERGIZAR LA LAMPARA 0 SOLO AL OPRIMIR LOS BOTONES 0, 1 Y 2 N.A.


ENERGIZAR LA LAMPARA 1 Y LA ALARMA 0 AL PULSAR CUALQUIERA DE LOS
BOTONES 3, 4 O 5 N.C.
DESCONECTAR LA ALARMA 1 AL OPRIMIR LOS BOTONES 1 Y 2 N.A.
ENCENDER LA LAMPARA 2 AL OPRIMIR SIMULTANEAMENTE EL BOTON 3 N.C. Y EL
BOTON 0 N.A.
APAGAR LA LAMPARA 3 AL OPRIMIR CUALQUIERA DE LOS BOTONES 3 O 4 N.C.
ENCENDER LA LAMPARA 4 AL OPRIMIR EL BOTON 5 N.C. O EL BOTON 0 N.A.

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

2. TABLA DE ASIGNACIONES.
PARA RESOLVER LAS TAREAS ANTERIORES LLENE LA SIGUIENTE TABLA CON EL
OBJETO DE ESTABLECER LAS ENTRADAS Y SALIDAS QUE UTILIZARA DEL PLC
IDENTIFICANDO SU RESPECTIVA DIRECCION ADEMAS DE SU ETIQUETA,
DENOMINACION Y COMENTARIO.
UNIDAD PRINCIPAL.
ENTRADA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

COMENTARIO

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA COMENTARIO

C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

C-6

C-7
SALIDA
C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

UNIDAD DE EXPANSION.
ENTRADA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

COMENTARIO

C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

C-6

C-7
SALIDA
C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

COMENTARIO

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

3. PROGRAMACION.
EFECTUE EL PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS (ESCALERA), EN LISTA DE
INSTRUCCIONES Y DETERMINE LA SECUENCIA DE TECLAS DEL PROGRAMADOR QUE
RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

PROGRAMADOR DE
BOLSILLO

PROGRAMA EN LENGUAJE:
LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES
DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA
(LADDER)
Al oprimir los botones 0, 1 y 2 N.A.
se activa la lampara 0.

La lampara 1 y la alarma 0 se activan al pulsar


cualquiera de los botones 3, 4 o 5 N.C.

Se desconecta la alarma 1 al oprimir los botones 1 y 2


N.A.

Se enciende la lampara 2 al oprimir simultaneamente el


boton 3 N.C. y el boton 0 N.A.

Se apaga la lampara 3
botones 3 o 4 N.C.

al oprimir cualquiera de los

Se activa la lampara 4 al oprimir el boton 5 N.C.. o el


boton 0 N.A.

(MNEMONICOS)
PASO

COMANDO

OPERANDOS

PGM-10
SECUENCIA DE
TECLAS

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

4.

DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO.
REALISE EL DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES ENTRE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA Y
SALIDA CON EL PLC QUE RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

5.

EDICION DEL PROGRAMA.


EDITE O CAPTURE SU PROGRAMA EN LADDER A TRAVES DEL SOFTWARE GPC DEL
MICROPLC D50.
NOMBRE A SU PROGRAMA COMO INS_BAS.
NO OLVIDE SALVAR SU TRABAJO CON LA FUNCION F5-SAVE Y DOCUMENTARLO CON
F4-CMMNT.

6.

COMPILACION Y TRANSFERENCIA DEL PROGRAMA.


EFECTUE LA COMPILACION DEL PROGRAMA USANDO LA FUNCION F10-MORE HASTA
ENCONTRAR LA FUNCION F6-COMPILE & EXIT.
CONTESTE LA CAJA DE COMPILACION CON LOS SIGUIENTES DATOS:
<Compiling to PLC Code>
LBL File Name : WITHOUT LABEL
LDR File Name : INS_BAS.LDR
PGM File Name : INS_BAS.PGM

DESCARGUE O TRANSFIERA EL CODIGO MAQUINA AL PLC.


PARA ESTO SELECCIONE LA OPCION [6] ON LINE DE LA VENTANA DEL MENU PRINCIPAL
Y SUBSECUENTEMENTE LA OPCION [2] DOWN LOADING, EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO
CON EXTENSION PGM (INS_BAS.PGM), EL NUMERO 255 COMO DESTINO DE LA CPU Y EL
PASWORD FEED.
CONTESTE LA PREGUNTA EN LA CAJA DE DIALOGO Do you Want to RUN [Y/N]? CON S O
NO DEPENDIENDO LA POSICION DEL ESTADO DE OPERACIN DEL PLC.
ACOMPLETE LA OPERACIN DE EJECUCION DE COMPILACION PRESIONANDO
CUALQUIER TECLA (COMPLETE: Press Any Key).

7. COMPROBACION DE FUNCIONAMIENTO.
DE ACUERDO A SU DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO CONECTE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE
ENTRADA/SALIDA AL CONTROLADOR Y VERIFIQUE QUE LA SOLUCION DE SU
PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA SATISFAGA LAS CONDICIONES DE LOS
PROBLEMAS PLANTEADOS.
EN CASO CONTRARIO MODIFIQUE SU PROGRAMA HASTA CUMPLIR CON LO REQUERIDO.
SOLICITE EL VISTO BUENO.
VO.BO._________________
UNA VEZ COMPROBADO EL CORRECTO FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA, LIMPIE
TOTALMENTE LA MEMORIA DEL USUARIO E INGRESE AHORA LAS INSTRUCCIONES A
TRAVES DEL PROGRAMADOR.
REVISE NUEVAMENTE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA.
SOLICITE EL VISTO BUENO
VO,BO._________________

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

CONCLUSIONES.

CUESTIONARIO.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

EXPLIQUE LAS INSTRUCCIONES:


EXAMINAR APAGADO (CONTACTO NORMALMENTE CERRADO)
EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO (CONTACTO NORMALMENTE ABIERTO)
ENERGIZAR SALIDA.
QUE ES UN ESCALON DE PROGRAMA?
PORQUE ES IMPORTANTE DOCUMENTAR UN PROGRAMA.
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA COMPILAR UN PROGRAMA EN LADDER.
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA ESCRIBIR UN PROGRAMA DE LA MEMORIA DE LA
COMPUTADORA A LA MEMORIA DEL PLC.

REFERENCIA BIBLIOGRAFICA.

MANUAL DEL SOFTWARE DEL CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE D50 / CUTLER HAMMER


MANUAL DE INICIO RAPIDO DEL MICROPLC D50 / CUTLER HAMMER
PRACTICAS ANTERIORES DEL CONTROLADOR LOGICO PROGRAMABLE
ELECTRONICA INDUSTRIAL MODERNA / MALONEY / PRENTICE HALL.

INSTRUCCIONES BASICAS: EXAMINAR ENCENDIDO, EXAMINAR APAGADO Y ENERGIZAR SALIDA.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.
CURSO: CONTROLADOR

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

EVALUACION DE COMPETENCIA LABORAL

LISTA DE COTEJO
PRACTICA NO.4.

INSTRUCCIONES DE ENTRADA-SALIDA

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

NO.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

REACTIVO

CUMPLIMIENTO
S
NO

OBSERVACIN

Resuelve una tarea de control aplicando las


instrucciones de entrada y salida obteniendo el
programa y diagrama solucin
Captura en computadora personal (PC) el
programa solucin
Conecta de acuerdo al diagrama solucin
Establece la comunicacin con el PLC desde la
PC
Compila y Transfiere el programa solucin
Coloca al PLC en estado de ejecucin
Comprueba el funcionamiento
Depura el programa solucin alternativamente
con el programador

FIRMAN DE COMUN ACUERDO

CAPACITANDO
_____________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

EVALUADOR
________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

TEMPORIZADORES.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.

CURSO: CONTROLADOR

PRACTICA NO.5.

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

TEMPORIZADORES.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

OBJETIVOS DE LA PRACTICA.
AL TERMINO DE ESTA PRACTICA USTED:

RECONOCERA UN SISTEMA DE TRABAJO PARA RESOLVER PROBLEMAS MEDIANTE PLC.


PROGRAMARA EN LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES Y EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS
INSTRUCCIONES DE TEMPORIZACION.
IDENTIFICARA LOS PROCEDIMIENTOS PARA EDITAR, CORREGIR, COMPILAR, TANSFERIR
Y MODIFICAR EN LINEA UN PROGRAMA.
CONECTARA DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA/SALIDA A LAS TERMINALES DEL PLC.
COMPROBARA EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE SU PROGRAMA.

EQUIPO, HERRAMIENTAS, INSTALACIONES Y SUMINISTROS.

SISTEMA ENTRENADOR PARA PLC.


TERMINALES DE CONEXION.
CABLE DE PROGRAMACION.
CONVERTIDOR DE INTERFASE.
COMPUTADORA PERSONAL
DISCO FLEXIBLE DE 3.5 HD

MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD.

EQUIPO Y TERMINALES DE CONEXIN EN BUEN ESTADO.


MANTENGA UN AISLAMIENTO PERSONAL EFECTIVO CON RESPECTO A TIERRA.
PROHIBIDO ENTRAR A OTROS PROGRAMAS INSTALADOS EN LA COMPUTADORA
NO REALISE NI MODIFIQUE NINGUNA CONEXIN CON EL CIRCUITO ENERGIZADO.
APLIQUE LAS NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD.
NO JUEGUE Y NO SE DISTRAIGA.

TEMPORIZADORES.

DESARROLLO PRACTICO.

1. PLANTEAMIENTO DE LAS TAREAS.


CONSIDERACIONES: LAMPARAS PILOTO DE 127 VAC Y ALARMAS DE 12 VDC.
A. ENCIENDA LA LAMPARA 0 DESPUES DE 5 SEG DE ACTIVAR EL INTERRUPTOR
SELECTOR 6 N.A.
AL REGRESAR EL INTERRUPTOR SELECTOR A SU POSICION INICIAL OFF LA
LAMPARA 0 SE APAGARA.
B. ENERGIZE CICLICAMENTE LA ALARMA 0 AL PRESIONAR EL BOTON 0 N.A.
TIEMPO DE ENCENDIDO PARA LA ALARMA 0 =4 SEG.
TIEMPO DE APAGADO PARA LA ALARMA 0 =2 SEG.
EL BOTON 1 N.C. DESCONECTARA LA ALARMA 0.
C. CONTROLE LA OPERACIN DE UN SEMAFORO EN MODO CICLO UNICO.
INICIO DEL CICLO: BOTON 2 N.A.
FIN DEL CICLO: BOTON 3 N.C.
TIEMPO DE ENCENDIDO:
LAMPARA 2 = VERDE = 3 SEG.
LAMPARA 3 = AMBAR = 1 SEG.
LAMPARA 4 = ROJA = 2 SEG.
D. MANTENGA 10 SEG.ENCENDIDA LA LAMPARA 1 AL ACTIVAR EL INTERRUPTOR
SELECTOR 6 N.A.

TEMPORIZADORES.

2. TABLA DE ASIGNACIONES.
PARA RESOLVER LAS TAREAS ANTERIORES LLENE LA SIGUIENTE TABLA CON EL
OBJETO DE ESTABLECER LAS ENTRADAS Y SALIDAS QUE UTILIZARA DEL PLC
IDENTIFICANDO SU RESPECTIVA DIRECCION ADEMAS DE SU ETIQUETA,
DENOMINACION Y COMENTARIO.
UNIDAD PRINCIPAL/UNIDAD DE EXPANSION.
ENTRADA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

COMENTARIO

C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

C-6

C-7
SALIDA
C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

COMENTARIO

TEMPORIZADORES.

3. PROGRAMACION.
EFECTUE EL PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS (ESCALERA), EN LISTA DE
INSTRUCCIONES Y DETERMINE LA SECUENCIA DE TECLAS DEL PROGRAMADOR QUE
RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

PROGRAMADOR DE
BOLSILLO

PROGRAMA EN LENGUAJE:
LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES
DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA
(LADDER)
Lampara con retardo al encendido

Lampara activada solo durante 10 seg.

.
Lampara con intermitencia.

a.

(MNEMONICOS)
PASO

COMANDO

OPERANDOS

PGM-10
SECUENCIA DE
TECLAS

TEMPORIZADORES.

PROGRAMADOR DE
BOLSILLO

PROGRAMA EN LENGUAJE:
LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES
DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA
(LADDER)
Semforo en modo ciclo nico.

(MNEMONICOS)
PASO

COMANDO

OPERANDOS

PGM-10
SECUENCIA DE
TECLAS

TEMPORIZADORES.

4.

DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO.
REALISE EL DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES ENTRE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA Y
SALIDA CON EL PLC QUE RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

TEMPORIZADORES.

5.

EDICION DEL PROGRAMA.


EDITE O CAPTURE SU PROGRAMA EN LADDER A TRAVES DEL SOFTWARE GPC DEL
MICROPLC D50.
NOMBRE A SU PROGRAMA COMO TIMERS.
NO OLVIDE SALVAR SU TRABAJO CON LA FUNCION F5-SAVE Y DOCUMENTARLO CON
F4-CMMNT.
SI EN SUS PROGRAMAS DE ESCALERA O DE LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES UTILIZA
ETIQUETAS PARA IDENTIFICAR LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADAS Y SALIDAS DEBERA
LLENAR LOS CUADROS DE REGISTROS SELECCIONANDO LA PROGRAMACION POR
ETIQUETAS; ESTO ES, DE LA VENTANA DEL MENU PRINCIPAL ELIJA LA OPCION
PROGRAMMING Y SUBSECUENTEMENTE LABEL, EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO TIMERS Y
LOS NOMBRES DE LAS ETIQUETAS DE LOS REGISTROS UTILIZADOS EN SU TABLA DE
ASIGNACIONES.

6.

COMPILACION Y TRANSFERENCIA DEL PROGRAMA.


EFECTUE LA COMPILACION DEL PROGRAMA USANDO LA FUNCION F10-MORE HASTA
ENCONTRAR LA FUNCION F6-COMPILE & EXIT.
CONTESTE LA CAJA DE COMPILACION CON LOS SIGUIENTES DATOS:
<Compiling to PLC Code>
LBL File Name : WITHOUT LABEL/TIMERS *
LDR File Name : TIMERS.LDR
PGM File Name : TIMERS.PGM
* = TIMERS EN CASO DE HABER USADO ETIQUETAS EN LA PROGRAMACION.
DESCARGUE O TRANSFIERA EL CODIGO MAQUINA AL PLC.
PARA ESTO SELECCIONE LA OPCION [6] ON LINE DE LA VENTANA DEL MENU PRINCIPAL
Y SUBSECUENTEMENTE LA OPCION [2] DOWN LOADING, EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO
CON EXTENSION PGM (TIMERS.PGM), EL NUMERO 255 COMO DESTINO DE LA CPU Y EL
PASWORD FEED.
CONTESTE LA PREGUNTA EN LA CAJA DE DIALOGO Do you Want to RUN [Y/N]? CON S O
NO DEPENDIENDO LA POSICION DEL ESTADO DE OPERACIN DEL PLC.
ACOMPLETE LA OPERACIN DE EJECUCION DE COMPILACION PRESIONANDO
CUALQUIER TECLA (COMPLETE: Press Any Key).

7. COMPROBACION DE FUNCIONAMIENTO.
DE ACUERDO A SU DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO CONECTE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE
ENTRADA/SALIDA AL CONTROLADOR Y VERIFIQUE QUE LA SOLUCION DE SU
PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA SATISFAGA LAS CONDICIONES DE LOS
PROBLEMAS PLANTEADOS.
EN CASO CONTRARIO MODIFIQUE SU PROGRAMA HASTA CUMPLIR CON LO REQUERIDO.
SOLICITE EL VISTO BUENO.
VO.BO._________________
UNA VEZ COMPROBADO EL CORRECTO FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA, LIMPIE
TOTALMENTE LA MEMORIA DEL USUARIO E INGRESE AHORA LAS INSTRUCCIONES A
TRAVES DEL PROGRAMADOR.
REVISE NUEVAMENTE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA Y SOLICITE EL VISTO
BUENO.
VO,BO._________________

TEMPORIZADORES.

CONCLUSIONES.

CUESTIONARIO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

TIPOS DE TEMPORIZADORES QUE MANEJA EL PLCD50?


DATOS IMPORTANTES PARA PROGRAMAR UN TEMPORIZADOR?
NUMERO E IDENTIFICACION DE TEMPORIZADORES CON TIEMPO BASE DE .01 SEG Y DE
.1 SEG?
CONDICION PARA QUE EL TIMER INICIE SU TEMPORIZACION?
CMO S RESETEA UN TEMPORIZADOR?
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PROGRAMAR CON ETIQUETAS.

REFERENCIA BIBLIOGRAFICA.

MANUAL DEL SOFTWARE Y HARDWARE DEL CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE D50 /


CUTLER HAMMER
MANUAL DE INICIO RAPIDO DEL MICROPLC D50 / CUTLER HAMMER
PRACTICAS ANTERIORES DEL CONTROLADOR LOGICO PROGRAMABLE
ELECTRONICA INDUSTRIAL MODERNA / MALONEY / PRENTICE HALL.
AUTOMATAS PROGRAMABLES / JOSEP BALCELLS / JOSE LUIS ROMERAL / SERIE MUNDO
ELECTRONICO / ALFAOMEGA MARCOMBO.

TEMPORIZADORES.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.
CURSO: CONTROLADOR

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

EVALUACION DE COMPETENCIA LABORAL

LISTA DE COTEJO
PRACTICA NO.5.

TEMPORIZADORES

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

NO.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

REACTIVO

CUMPLIMIENTO
S
NO

OBSERVACIN

Resuelve una tarea de control aplicando las


instrucciones de entrada-salida y temporizacin
obteniendo el programa y diagrama solucin
Captura en computadora personal (PC) el
programa solucin
Conecta de acuerdo al diagrama solucin
Establece la comunicacin con el PLC desde la
PC
Compila y Transfiere el programa solucin
Coloca al PLC en estado de ejecucin
Comprueba el funcionamiento
Depura la solucin alternativamente con el
programador

FIRMAN DE COMUN ACUERDO

CAPACITANDO
_____________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

EVALUADOR
________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

CONTADORES.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.

CURSO: CONTROLADOR

PRACTICA NO.6.

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE

CONTADORES.

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

OBJETIVOS DE LA PRACTICA.
AL TERMINAR ESTA PRACTICA USTED:

RECONOCERA UN SISTEMA DE TRABAJO PARA RESOLVER PROBLEMAS MEDIANTE PLC.


PROGRAMARA EN LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES Y EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS
INSTRUCCIONES DE CONTEO.
IDENTIFICARA LOS PROCEDIMIENTOS PARA EDITAR, CORREGIR, COMPILAR, TANSFERIR
Y MODIFICAR EN LINEA UN PROGRAMA.
CONECTARA DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA/SALIDA A LAS TERMINALES DEL PLC.
COMPROBARA EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DE SU PROGRAMA.

EQUIPO, HERRAMIENTAS, INSTALACIONES Y SUMINISTROS.

SISTEMA ENTRENADOR PARA PLC.


TERMINALES DE CONEXION.
CABLE DE PROGRAMACION.
CONVERTIDOR DE INTERFASE.
COMPUTADORA PERSONAL
DISCO FLEXIBLE DE 3.5 HD

MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD.

EQUIPO Y TERMINALES DE CONEXIN EN BUEN ESTADO.


MANTENGA UN AISLAMIENTO PERSONAL EFECTIVO CON RESPECTO A TIERRA.
PROHIBIDO ENTRAR A OTROS PROGRAMAS INSTALADOS EN LA COMPUTADORA
NO REALISE NI MODIFIQUE NINGUNA CONEXIN CON EL CIRCUITO ENERGIZADO.
APLIQUE LAS NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD.
NO JUEGUE Y NO SE DISTRAIGA.

CONTADORES.

DESARROLLO PRACTICO.

1. PLANTEAMIENTO DE LAS TAREAS.


CONSIDERACIONES: LAMPARAS PILOTO DE 127 VAC Y ALARMAS DE 12 VDC.
A. LA ALARMA 0 DEBERA SONAR SOLO AL OPRIMIR POR 3 VEZ EL BOTON 0 N.A. Y SOLO
SERA DESACTIVADA AL PULSAR EL BOTON 1 N.C.
B. AL PRESIONAR POR 1 VEZ EL BOTON 2 N.A. SE ENCIENDE LA LAMPARA 0.
AL PRESIONAR POR 2 VEZ EL BOTON 2 N.A. SE APAGA LA LAMPARA 0.
C. LA LAMPARA 1 OPERA INTERMITENTEMENTE CADA SEG.DE ENCENDIDDO POR MEDIO
SEG.DE APAGADO.
AL PRESIONAR EL BOTON 3 N.C. DICHA LAMPARA FUNCIONARA SOLO DURANTE 4
CICLOS COMPLETOS.
D. EL BOTON 4 N.A. Y EL BOTON 5 N.A. SON PARTE DE UN SISTEMA DE SEGURIDAD.
LA LAMPARA 4 SOLO SE ACTIVARA AL OPRIMIR SECUENCIALMENTE 3 VECES EL
BOTON 4 Y 2 VECES EL BOTON 5.
EN CUALQUIER OTRO CASO QUE SE PULSEN LOS BOTONES LA LAMPARA NUNCA SE
ACTIVARA.

CONTADORES.

2. TABLA DE ASIGNACIONES.
PARA RESOLVER LAS TAREAS ANTERIORES LLENE LA SIGUIENTE TABLA CON EL
OBJETO DE ESTABLECER LAS ENTRADAS Y SALIDAS QUE UTILIZARA DEL PLC
IDENTIFICANDO SU RESPECTIVA DIRECCION ADEMAS DE SU ETIQUETA,
DENOMINACION Y COMENTARIO.
UNIDAD PRINCIPAL/UNIDAD DE EXPANSION.
ENTRADA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

DIRECCION

DENOMINACION

ETIQUETA

COMENTARIO

C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

C-6

C-7
SALIDA
C-0

C-1

C-2

C-3

C-4

C-5

COMENTARIO

CONTADORES.

3. PROGRAMACION.
EFECTUE EL PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE CONTACTOS (ESCALERA), EN LISTA DE
INSTRUCCIONES Y DETERMINE LA SECUENCIA DE TECLAS DEL PROGRAMADOR QUE
RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

PROGRAMADOR DE
BOLSILLO

PROGRAMA EN LENGUAJE:
LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES
DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA
(LADDER)
Alarma 0 activada al oprimir tres veces el botn 0.
La alarma se desactiva al presionar el botn 1.

Botn 2 con funciones de:


Encendido (al pulsarlo por 1.vez) y
Apagado (al presionarlo por 2.vez).

(MNEMONICOS)
PASO

COMANDO

OPERANDOS

PGM-10
SECUENCIA DE
TECLAS

CONTADORES.

PROGRAMADOR DE
BOLSILLO

PROGRAMA EN LENGUAJE:
LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES
DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA
(LADDER)
Lampara con intermitencia continua.
Al presionar el botn 2 solo funcionara durante 4 ciclos
completos

Sistema de seguridad con botones pulsadores.


La lampara 4 solo encender si se oprime 3 veces el botn
3 y 2 veces el botn 4.

(MNEMONICOS)
PASO

COMANDO

OPERANDOS

PGM-10
SECUENCIA DE
TECLAS

CONTADORES.

4.

DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO.
REALISE EL DIAGRAMA DE CONEXIONES ENTRE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADA Y
SALIDA CON EL PLC QUE RESUELVA LOS PLANTEAMIENTOS ANTERIORES.

CONTADORES.

5.

EDICION DEL PROGRAMA.


EDITE O CAPTURE SU PROGRAMA EN LADDER A TRAVES DEL SOFTWARE GPC DEL
MICROPLC D50.
NOMBRE A SU PROGRAMA COMO COUNTS.
NO OLVIDE SALVAR SU TRABAJO CON LA FUNCION F5-SAVE Y DOCUMENTARLO CON
F4-CMMNT.
SI EN SUS PROGRAMAS DE ESCALERA O DE LISTA DE INSTRUCCIONES UTILIZA
ETIQUETAS PARA IDENTIFICAR LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE ENTRADAS Y SALIDAS DEBERA
LLENAR LOS CUADROS DE REGISTROS SELECCIONANDO LA PROGRAMACION POR
ETIQUETAS; ESTO ES, DE LA VENTANA DEL MENU PRINCIPAL ELIJA LA OPCION
PROGRAMMING Y SUBSECUENTEMENTE LABEL, EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO COUNTS Y
LOS NOMBRES DE LAS ETIQUETAS DE LOS REGISTROS UTILIZADOS EN SU TABLA DE
ASIGNACIONES.

6.

COMPILACION Y TRANSFERENCIA DEL PROGRAMA.


EFECTUE LA COMPILACION DEL PROGRAMA USANDO LA FUNCION F10-MORE HASTA
ENCONTRAR LA FUNCION F6-COMPILE & EXIT.
CONTESTE LA CAJA DE COMPILACION CON LOS SIGUIENTES DATOS:
<Compiling to PLC Code>
LBL File Name : WITHOUT LABEL/COUNTS *
LDR File Name :COUNTS.LDR
PGM File Name : COUNTS.PGM
* = COUNTS EN CASO DE HABER USADO ETIQUETAS EN LA PROGRAMACION.
DESCARGUE O TRANSFIERA EL CODIGO MAQUINA AL PLC.
PARA ESTO SELECCIONE LA OPCION [6] ON LINE DE LA VENTANA DEL MENU PRINCIPAL
Y SUBSECUENTEMENTE LA OPCION [2] DOWN LOADING, EL NOMBRE DEL ARCHIVO
CON EXTENSION PGM (COUNTS.PGM), EL NUMERO 255 COMO DESTINO DE LA CPU Y EL
PASWORD FEED.
CONTESTE LA PREGUNTA EN LA CAJA DE DIALOGO Do you Want to RUN [Y/N]? CON S O
NO DEPENDIENDO LA POSICION DEL ESTADO DE OPERACIN DEL PLC.
ACOMPLETE LA OPERACIN DE EJECUCION DE COMPILACION PRESIONANDO
CUALQUIER TECLA (COMPLETE: Press Any Key).

7. COMPROBACION DE FUNCIONAMIENTO.
DE ACUERDO A SU DIAGRAMA DE ALAMBRADO CONECTE LOS DISPOSITIVOS DE
ENTRADA/SALIDA AL CONTROLADOR Y VERIFIQUE QUE LA SOLUCION DE SU
PROGRAMA EN DIAGRAMA DE ESCALERA SATISFAGA LAS CONDICIONES DE LOS
PROBLEMAS PLANTEADOS.
EN CASO CONTRARIO MODIFIQUE SU PROGRAMA HASTA CUMPLIR CON LO REQUERIDO.
SOLICITE EL VISTO BUENO.
VO.BO._________________
UNA VEZ COMPROBADO EL CORRECTO FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA, LIMPIE
TOTALMENTE LA MEMORIA DEL USUARIO E INGRESE AHORA LAS INSTRUCCIONES A
TRAVES DEL PROGRAMADOR.
REVISE NUEVAMENTE EL FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL PROGRAMA Y SOLICITE EL VISTO
BUENO.
VO,BO._________________

CONTADORES.

CONCLUSIONES.

CUESTIONARIO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

TIPOS DE CONTADORES QUE MANEJA EL PLCD50?


DATOS IMPORTANTES PARA PROGRAMAR UN CONTADOR?
NUMERO E IDENTIFICACION DE CONTADORES?
CONDICION PARA QUE EL CONTADOR INICIE SU CUENTA?
CMO S RESETEA UN CONTADOR?
DESCRIBA EL PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PROGRAMAR CON ETIQUETAS.

REFERENCIA BIBLIOGRAFICA.

MANUAL DEL SOFTWARE Y HARDWARE DEL CONTROLADOR PROGRAMABLE D50 /


CUTLER HAMMER
MANUAL DE INICIO RAPIDO DEL MICROPLC D50 / CUTLER HAMMER
PRACTICAS ANTERIORES DEL CONTROLADOR LOGICO PROGRAMABLE
ELECTRONICA INDUSTRIAL MODERNA / MALONEY / PRENTICE HALL.
AUTOMATAS PROGRAMABLES / JOSEP BALCELLS / JOSE LUIS ROMERAL / SERIE MUNDO
ELECTRONICO / ALFAOMEGA MARCOMBO.

CONTADORES.

SEP

DIRECCION GENERAL DE CENTROS DE FORMACION PARA EL TRABAJO

SEIT

CENTRO DE CAPACITACION PARA EL TRABAJO INDUSTRIAL NO.90


ESPECIALIDAD: ELECTRICIDAD.
CURSO: CONTROLADOR

LOGICO PROGRAMABLE.

EVALUACION DE COMPETENCIA LABORAL

LISTA DE COTEJO
PRACTICA NO.6.

CONTADORES

NOMBRE DEL ALUMNO._________________________________________________ EQUIPO NO.____

NO.
1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8

REACTIVO

CUMPLIMIENTO
S
NO

OBSERVACIN

Resuelve una tarea de control aplicando las


instrucciones de entrada-salida, temporizacin
y conteo obteniendo el programa y diagrama
solucin
Captura en computadora personal (PC) el
programa solucin
Conecta de acuerdo al diagrama solucin
Establece la comunicacin con el PLC desde la
PC
Compila y Transfiere el programa solucin
Coloca al PLC en estado de ejecucin
Comprueba el funcionamiento
Depura la solucin alternativamente con el
programador

FIRMAN DE COMUN ACUERDO

CAPACITANDO
_____________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

EVALUADOR
________________________
NOMBRE Y FIRMA

You might also like